JP2020073051A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of reducing the amount of data to be stored.SOLUTION: Control means repeatedly performs a read-out process and a setting process. In the former process, in accordance with predetermined control procedures, a plurality of setting destination data indicating setting destinations to which setting regarding a game is performed is sequentially read out from storage means, and in the latter process, predetermined setting values are individually set to the setting destinations indicated by the setting destination data read out by the read-out process. In this way, without having stored in a game machine the setting values for being set in the setting destinations indicated by the setting destination data, the predetermined setting values can be set by the setting process. Therefore, there is an effect that the amount of data to be stored in the predetermined setting values can be reduced.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, change the state by setting a set value to a plurality of setting destinations that make settings relating to the game state when the game state is changed. In such a gaming machine, in order to set a setting value, a setting destination to which the setting value is set and a setting value to be set in the setting destination are previously defined in a storage means such as a ROM, and the state is changed. Makes settings according to the contents specified in the storage means.

JP 2002-000905 A

  However, among the plurality of setting destinations of such gaming machines, there may be setting destinations having common setting values. In this case, in the storage means, it is necessary to define common set values as many as the number of setting destinations for setting the set values, so that the same data is defined multiple times, increasing the amount of data in the storage means. There was a risk that

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the amount of data.

  To achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 stores a plurality of control means for controlling the game according to a predetermined control procedure, and a plurality of setting destination data indicating a setting destination for the control means to make settings relating to the game. And a read processing for sequentially reading the setting destination data from the storage means according to the control procedure, and a predetermined setting destination indicated by the setting destination data read by the reading processing. The setting process for setting the respective setting values is repeated.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the control means is based on the read one setting destination data every time one setting destination data is read by the reading processing. The setting process is performed.

  According to a third aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, the setting destination data is defined in an order of being read by the control means.

  According to the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the storage means stores a plurality of setting destination data indicating a setting destination to which the control means for controlling the game performs the setting relating to the game according to a predetermined control procedure. The control means performs a reading process for sequentially reading the setting destination data from the storage means in accordance with a control procedure, and a setting process for setting a predetermined set value to the setting destination indicated by the setting destination data read by the reading process. It is repeated.

  Thus, the predetermined setting value can be set by the setting process without storing the setting value for setting the setting destination data read by the reading process in the gaming machine. Therefore, there is an effect that the amount of data stored in the predetermined set value can be reduced.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1, every time the setting data of 1 is read by the reading process, based on the read setting data of 1 Since the setting process is performed by the control means, the amount of data read by the read process and set by the setting process can be minimized.

  According to the gaming machine described in claim 3, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine recited in claim 2, the following effect is exhibited. That is, since the setting destination data is defined in the order in which it is read by the control means, a process of determining which data among the data stored in the storage means should be read next each time the reading processing is performed. There is no need to do. This has the effect of reducing the processing load on the control means.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM in a main control apparatus, (b) shows typically the correspondence of the 1st hit classification counter C2 and the jackpot classification in a special symbol. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second random number counter C4 and the hit in the normal symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the game result setting table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the state setting table. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the setting table at the time of jackpot completion, and (b) is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the clear table at the time of jackpot completion. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of various setting value storage areas. It is a schematic diagram which showed the structure of the register typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit judgment processing which is executed by the MPU inside the main control unit. 6 is a flowchart showing a jackpot setting process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is the flowchart which showed the game result set value acquisition processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control control equipment. 6 is a flowchart showing a disconnection time setting process executed by an MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows a through gate passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot termination processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows data setting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the zero setting process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the starting-up process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM in the main-control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment, (b) schematically shows the content of the jackpot end setting / clear table in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM in the main-control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the content of the jackpot end initial value setting table in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot termination processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the zero setting process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 18 serves as an opening / closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided serves as an opening / closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the rear surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with its front surface protruding and the upper surface opened, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the balls thrown into the upper plate 17 are guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. Operated.

  The stage is a production mode in which various productions displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are made uniform, and in the pachinko machine 10, three stages of “a town stage”, an “empty stage”, and an “island stage”. There are two stages. Then, various effects such as a variation effect and a reach effect that are performed in association with the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting prize), which will be described later, are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been done. The change of the stage is performed when the player operates the frame button 22 during a period in which no change effect is performed or during high-speed change. Every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “town stage” → “empty stage” is changed. ”→“ Island stage ”→“ City stage ”→ ... Immediately after the power is turned on, the "town stage" is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, in the third symbol display device 81, when the normal reach effect is started, when the normal reach is developed to the super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect contents at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided illumination portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED built therein. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when the jackpot or the reach production is performed, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right illumination portion 32 by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

  A ball rental operating unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on the information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which a ball is directly lent to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to share a pachinko machine using a card unit with a cash machine.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a for pressing, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. (Not shown) and are built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes as a result, and thus the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, there is provided a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and has a large number of nails for guiding balls, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first prize. It is configured by assembling the ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80 and the like, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and wood screws are applied from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and divided by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (where a winning opening or the like is arranged, and a shot ball is It is the area that flows down.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. While being attenuated, it is bounced back toward the center. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn when a ball enters the first entrance 64, and a normal symbol (first when the ball passes through the second entrance 67). A lottery of 2 symbols) will be held. In the lottery of the special symbol performed for the entrance into the first entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the jackpot type Is also determined. When it becomes a big hit of the special symbol, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds or until 10 balls are won). ) It is opened and the opening is repeated multiple times. As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, and thus a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are 13 types of special symbols as jackpot types: "hour saving jackpot A" to "hour saving jackpot C", and "probability variation jackpot A" to "probability variation jackpot J", and the jackpot ends after the special gaming state ends. As a later added value, a game value (game value) according to these jackpot types is given to the player. Although details will be described later, for example, when the jackpot type is “probable variation jackpot A”, a game value of shifting to a high probability state of a special symbol after the jackpot is given. Further, if the jackpot type is "time saving jackpot B", after the jackpot is finished, the gaming value that the time saving state of the normal symbol continues until the special symbol is drawn 30 times is given.

  Further, when the special symbol (first symbol) is selected, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, The special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entered balls is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the first symbol display. It is shown by the device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display ends in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, a lottery for the next special symbol is performed and a variable display corresponding to the lottery. Is started. The specific winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player hits a ball to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that a large number of balls also enter the first winning opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 is maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state.

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball in the second entrance 67, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol is hit. When the normal pattern hits, the electric accessory that accompanies the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It becomes a state. That is, when the normal symbol hits, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64, and as a result, the special symbol is easily selected by lottery.

  Further, when the regular symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the variable symbol of the ordinary symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) elapses, The ordinary symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the sphere passes through the second entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the first symbol display device 37. While being displayed, the second symbol holding lamp 84 is also displayed. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next ordinary symbol is selected by lottery and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started.

  As described above, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, "normal jackpot", "time saving jackpot A", "hour saving jackpot B", "special jackpot A", "special jackpot B", and "probable variation jackpot A" ~ " There are 13 types of "Probability jackpot H".

  When the "normal jackpot" is reached, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 16 rounds (16 round jackpot), but no added value is given after the jackpot is over. That is, after the jackpot is finished, it shifts to a low probability state of the special symbol, and does not shift to the "time saving state of the normal symbol" (ordinary symbol time saving).

  When both "time saving jackpot A" and "time saving jackpot B", the number of rounds goes into a special game state of 16 rounds (16 round jackpot), and after that, as an added value after the jackpot ends, "ordinary symbol time saving state" (Transition to (Short-time and medium-sized design)). However, in "time saving jackpot A" and "time saving jackpot B", the period in which the "ordinary symbol saving time" (ordinary symbol saving time) continues is different. Specifically, “time saving jackpot A” does not depend on the state when the jackpot is won, and the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased from the end of the jackpot to the end of the special symbol lottery 20 times. On the other hand, the "time saving jackpot B" has a difference in the duration of the "ordinary symbol time saving state" depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if you win the "Short-time jackpot B" during the high probability state of the special symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases after the jackpot ends and the special symbol lottery ends 30 times. If you win the "Short-time jackpot B" during the low probability state of the symbol, the winning probability of the normal symbol increases from after the jackpot until the special symbol lottery ends 20 times. In the present embodiment, the number of times the special symbol is drawn defines the period during which the time saving state of the normal symbol continues, but for example, it may be defined by the number of times the fluctuation of the special symbol ends.

  In addition, if you win the "special jackpot A" or "special jackpot B", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 8 rounds (8 round jackpot), and thereafter, depending on the state before winning the jackpot, " Transition to "high probability state of special symbol", or "low probability state of special symbol", and transition to "time saving state of normal symbol". Specifically, if you win the "special jackpot A" or "special jackpot B" during the time saving of the regular symbols that are given after various types of time and jackpot, if you win the jackpot, move to the "high probability state of special symbols". To do. On the other hand, in a state other than the time saving of the normal symbol given after the completion of various time saving jackpots (that is, during the high probability state of the special symbol, or during the low probability state of the special symbol, and during the normal state of the normal symbol) If you win the "special jackpot A" or "special jackpot B", it shifts to the "time saving state of normal symbols". In addition, after the jackpot is over, "the time saving state of the ordinary symbol" is continued until the lottery for the special symbol is completed 20 times in the "special jackpot A", and the special symbol is in the "special jackpot B". It is until the lottery is completed 30 times.

  Furthermore, in "probability variation jackpot A" to "probability variation jackpot H", all become special gaming state, and then shift to "high probability state of special symbol" as added value after the jackpot. However, in “probable variation jackpot A” to “probable variation jackpot H”, the number of rounds of the jackpot and the operation pattern of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a are different from each other. Specifically, in "probable variation jackpot A" to "probable variation jackpot D", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 16 rounds (16 round jackpot), and in "probability variation jackpot E" to "probability variation jackpot H", the number of rounds is It becomes a special game state of 2 rounds (2 round jackpot).

  Further, in "probable variation jackpot A" and "probability variation jackpot F" to "probability variation jackpot H", in each round during the special gaming state, the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is another jackpot type. Is different from. Specifically, in "time saving jackpot A" to "hour saving jackpot C", "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot D" to "probability variation jackpot G", 30 seconds elapse in each round. Or the specific winning opening (large opening mouth) 65a is opened until 10 balls are won, whereas in the "probability variation jackpot C" and "probability variation jackpot H" to "probability variation jackpot J", In the round, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened until 0.5 seconds elapses or until 10 balls are won.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the upper limit is set for the number of times the game ball is shot (for example, 100 times at maximum per minute), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) within 0.5 seconds. ) It is extremely difficult to win 10 balls in 65a, and in most cases, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed before winning 10 balls. Therefore, with “probable variation jackpot C” and “probable variation jackpot H” to “probability variation jackpot J”, the number of prize balls per round that the player can obtain is smaller than that of other jackpot types.

  Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, a so-called probability state of the special symbol (during a change in the special symbol), in other words, a special game state (big hit) It is a state of the game that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, if it is not "high probability state of special symbol", it is called "low probability state of special symbol", this is a state where the jackpot probability is lower than the probability change state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbols). Further, the "time saving state of the normal symbol" (during the time saving of the regular symbol) is a state of the game in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not "time saving state of ordinary symbol", it is called "normal state of ordinary symbol", which means that the winning probability of ordinary symbol is normal, that is, the winning probability is lower than that during the time saving. ..

  After that, the period when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol after the special symbol big hit ends, that is, "hour saving big hit A" or "time saving big hit B" ends, and then the special symbol lottery Until the predetermined number of times (20 times, 30 times) is finished, it is called a time saving period of a normal symbol. In addition, in order to make the explanation easy to understand, the short time period of the normal symbol is shown by using the number of lottery of the special symbol. For example, if the predetermined number of times is 20 times, it is described that the time saving period of the normal symbol is 20 times. In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with various game states such as a jackpot state, a time saving state of a normal symbol, and a probability variation state of a special symbol, so that the player's interest is improved. There is.

  As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of jackpot according to the type of jackpot, the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening mouth) 65a in each round, and the state after the jackpot is finished. (Whether the special symbol is in the probable state or the normal symbol is in a time saving state) and each. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be the same regardless of the jackpot type, or the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a in each round may be the same regardless of the jackpot type. Further, for example, instead of changing the period of "time saving state of the normal symbol" according to the type of jackpot, the time to open the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 64 or once. It is also possible to change the number of times the electric accessory is released by hitting the ordinary pattern. Further, the number of rounds and the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a are not limited to the aspect of the present embodiment, and, for example, a big jackpot of 4 rounds or a jackpot of 9 rounds may be provided. The conditions for closing the winning opening (large opening) 65a include, for example, "3 seconds have passed or 10 balls have won" or "10 seconds have passed or 5 balls have won." A jackpot of the condition "until you do" may be provided. Further, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot, it is configured to shift to one of the "high probability state of the special symbol" or the "time saving state of the ordinary symbol", but the jackpot ends After the special symbol lottery ends a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times), it is always configured to be in the "high probability state of special symbol", and after the predetermined number of special symbol lottery ends, While shifting to the "low probability state of special symbol", it may be configured to be "time saving state of normal symbol" or "normal state of normal symbol".

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot type becomes "hour saving jackpot A", the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is continued after the "hour saving jackpot A" ends and the special symbol lottery ends 20 times, and "hour saving jackpot B" When it becomes ", the time saving state of the normal symbol is continued until the special symbol lottery is completed 20 times or 30 times after the end of the" hour saving big hit B ", but the duration of the time saving state may be arbitrarily set. .. For example, when the jackpot type is "time saving jackpot A", after the "hour saving jackpot A" ends the special symbol lottery continues until the special symbol lottery ends 60 times, and when "time saving jackpot B", The time saving state of the normal symbol may be continued until the special symbol lottery is completed 120 times after the "time saving jackpot B". Further, instead of the number of times the special symbol is drawn, the time saving state of the normal symbol may be continued until a predetermined time (for example, 2 minutes to 5 minutes) elapses.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot types (“time saving jackpot A”, “special jackpot A”, and “special jackpot A”) that differ the added value given to the player after the jackpot is finished according to the gaming state when the jackpot is won. Although a special jackpot B ") is provided, the added value given to the player after the jackpot is finished may be fixed regardless of the gaming state when the jackpot is won. For example, if you win the "Short-time jackpot A", regardless of the state when you hit the jackpot, the special symbol lottery will be continued until the special symbol lottery is finished 20 times after the jackpot is over. If you win the "special jackpot A" or "special jackpot B", regardless of the state at the time of jackpot winning, it may be configured to shift to a high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot.

  The first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side in the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by changing the lighting state to indicate whether or not the special symbol lottery that is performed in association with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) is being performed, As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown in a lighting state, or fluctuation among the balls entered in the first ball entrance 64 is not executed. The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls), is indicated by a lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of entry is suspended up to 4 times. , The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reservations is not limited to four and is three or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, in the present embodiment, only one first ball entrance 64 is provided, but a plurality of first ball entrances 64 may be provided. In this case, the ball may be suspended for each type of the first ball inlet 64 into which the ball has entered. Further, when the variation is executed according to the reserved ball, the variation may be executed in the order in which the ball is entered without considering the type of the first entrance 64, or when the reserved ball is present. The first ball entrance 64 that preferentially executes the variation may be provided. When a plurality of first ball entrances 64 are provided, the jackpot winning probability or the selection ratio of each jackpot type may be changed according to the type of the first ball entrance 64.

  The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds in a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the light emission colors of the respective LEDs (for example, red, green, and blue) are different, and by combining the light emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs (high probability state of special symbols) Or, it is possible to display normal patterns such as reduced working hours. Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of fluctuation, but when it is a big hit, the big hit type ("normal big hit", "time saving big hit A "," Short-time jackpot B "," Special jackpot A "," Special jackpot B "," Probability variation jackpot A "to" Probability variation jackpot H ") special symbols (first symbol) are shown.

  Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), it is used as a trigger to perform variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) on the first symbol display device 37. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right. The columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main controller 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9". Each main design is formed by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear design consisting of a wooden box, of which the main designs with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are attached to the front of the wooden box with attached patterns simulating characters such as plane, furoshiki, and helmet. An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached design, and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached design.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 6) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is displayed.

  For example, if the special symbol lottery result is any one of "normal jackpot", "hour saving jackpot A", "hour saving jackpot B", "special jackpot A", "special jackpot B", an even number "0, The variable display in which the main symbols to which "2, 4, 6, 8" are added are arranged is displayed. In addition, if "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot E" to "probability variation jackpot H", variations in which main symbols having odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 9" except "7" are aligned If the display is performed and if the "probability variation jackpot B" to "probability variation jackpot D" (that is, if it is the most advantageous 16 round probability variation jackpot) for the player, the main symbol with the odd number "7" added The variable displays are displayed in a uniform manner. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of alignment, the variable display in which the main symbols having the same number are not arranged is displayed. With such a configuration, the jackpot type can be recognized only by confirming the aligned main symbols.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, other than that. The upper one-third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed on the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of numbers, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from the top to the bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol column Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol column Z2 and the right symbol column Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of the jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols in the present embodiment) is arranged on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area that displays the number of reserved balls that is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, which suggests to the player that the jackpot is in a state where it is easier to make a transition to the big hit than usual. In the small area Ds2 in the center, usually, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy with a hachimaki) performs a predetermined motion, sometimes performs a special motion different from the predetermined motion, or another character appears. A notice production is performed by putting it out.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the maximum number of times of entry is four. The number of balls to be reserved is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved sphere number pattern is displayed for each reserved sphere number, and the number of reserved spheres is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved sphere number patterns. That is, when one reserved sphere number design is displayed in the small area Ds1, it means that the number of reserved spheres is one sphere, and when four reserved sphere count designs are displayed, the number of reserved spheres is It shows that it is four balls. If the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, but the maximum number of reserved balls is three times. It may be set to the number below or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not the lottery of the normal symbol that is performed along with the ball passing through the second entrance 67 is being performed, As a stop symbol after the end of the variation, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is shown in a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the sphere passes through the second ball entrance 67, the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped by a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○"), the electric accessory that accompanies the first entrance 64 operates for a predetermined time. The state is set (opened), and as a result, the ball is easily inserted into the first ball inlet 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed in the second symbol reserve lamp 84. It Four of the second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the passage of the ball in the second entrance 67 is not limited to the maximum number of reserved balls 4 times as in the case of the first entrance 64, and the number of times is 3 times or less, or 5 times or more. (For example, 8 times) may be set. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be lit.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first ball entrance switch. A lottery for special symbols is made by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is also one of the prize holes through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally elongated rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 is a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed so that the big hit is stopped. While making it, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to the special game state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal time. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse, or 10 balls are won, or 0.5 seconds elapses, or a ball Will be released).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated a number of times according to the jackpot type. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing on the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. It has and. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which a ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower side of the front face to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normally closed state. The state and the state operate alternately.

  The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning is achieved. A special game state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is being opened. It may be formed.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It can be seen through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the outlet 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (fire control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

  The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

  Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to extend over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. To be cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, the tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and the downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A RAM 203, a register 210 for temporarily storing data necessary for reading and writing when reading various data from the ROM 202 or RAM 203, or writing various data to the RAM 203, and an interrupt circuit. Various circuits such as a timer circuit and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmitting / receiving circuit in order to instruct the sub control unit such as the payout control unit 111 and the voice lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 6A, in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as a part of the above-mentioned fixed value data, a first per random number table 202a, a first per type selection table 202b, and a second per random number table 202c. At least a fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, a game result setting table 202e, a state setting table 202f, a jackpot end time setting table 202g, and a jackpot end time clear table 202h are stored.

  The first hit random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which a big hit determination value of a first hit random number counter C1 described later is stored. The details of the first random number table 202a will be described later together with the description of the first random number counter C1.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 6B) is a data table in which the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the big hit type is set for each big hit type. The details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described later together with the description of the first hit type counter C2.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 6C) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. The details of the second random number table 202c will be described later together with the description of the second random number counter C4.

  The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) is a data table in which the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is set for each display mode. In this variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the determination result of the special symbol big hit, the gaming state, etc. are defined. For example, it is a table for selecting a variation pattern at the time of a big hit, or a table for selecting a variation pattern at the time of a hit. In addition, there are a plurality of tables for selecting a variation pattern at the time of big hit, and different tables are selected for each big hit type. Further, there are a plurality of tables for selecting the variation pattern at the time of deviation, and for example, a table or the like that is selected only after the jackpot is finished is provided. The details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  In the game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 7), when a big hit is won, setting values such as a stop symbol indicating a big hit and an operation pattern of a specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a during the big hit are set. It is a data table specified for each jackpot type. The game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 7) is stored in the range of addresses "19D8H" to "1A2BH" of the ROM 202, and 1-byte data is stored at each address. In this game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 7), the number of judgment values (random number values) for each jackpot type (the number of judgment values), the lighting pattern (the number of display symbols) of the plurality of LEDs 37a, and the special symbol Information indicating a stop symbol (stop symbol information), an operation pattern of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a (large opening opening pattern), and a fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d are selected. Information (table selection information) indicating which one is selected from a plurality of tables for use in determining the variation pattern, and information (offset 1, offset 2) for determining the gaming state after the jackpot is over. ) And are specified. In FIG. 7, the address of the ROM 202 where each data is defined is shown in parentheses, but the upper byte of the address of the ROM 202 is omitted and only the lower byte is shown.

  In this pachinko machine 10, based on winning the jackpot, from the game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 7), the above setting values according to the winning jackpot type, various setting value storage area 203e of the RAM 203 (Figure 11)). Details of the various set value storage areas 203e will be described later. Then, on the basis of the set values stored in the various set value storage areas 203e, the MPU 201 performs various control related to a variation pattern effect that is a big hit and a big hit. In addition, in the various setting value storage area 203e (see FIG. 11), in addition to the storage area for storing the setting values related to the game, the offset 1 and the offset 2 defined in the game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 7) are set. An offset value storage area for storing the offset value calculated based on the above is provided. This offset value is a value used to set the game state after the jackpot is finished. The details will be described later, but refer to the offset 1 and the offset 2 in the game result set value acquisition process (see FIG. 17). Is a value calculated by

  Specifically, in the jackpot end process (see FIG. 26) executed when it is determined to be the jackpot end timing, various setting values related to the gaming state after the jackpot end (whether or not to be a high probability state of the special symbol) Is used to set various setting values in the various setting value storage areas 203e by selecting from the state setting table 202f (refer to FIG. 8) a setting value indicating, or a normal symbol time saving period. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the random number value (counter value) itself that is acquired in association with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) continues to be held until the end of the jackpot, and the disturbance thereof. The game state after the jackpot is over is not determined based on the numerical value (counter value), and the random number value (counter value) is acquired with the entrance into the first entrance 64 (start prize). Only the offset value selected on the basis of the big hit is held.

  Here, if it is configured to hold a random number value that is a jackpot during the variation pattern production at the time of jackpot winning and during the subsequent jackpot state, the jackpot random number is read by the unauthorized player Random value may be specified. Therefore, the timing at which the specified random number value appears may be analyzed, and the jackpot may be apt to be fraudulently assigned based on the analyzed timing. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the obtained random number value (counter value) is converted into a form of an offset value and held until the jackpot end time, and the gaming state after the jackpot end is set based on the offset value. Since it is configured as such, it is possible to limit the period in which the random number value itself which is a big hit of the special symbol is held for a short period. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally obtain a random number value that is a jackpot for a special symbol from outside, analyze the timing when the random number value that is a jackpot appears, and assign the jackpot based on the analyzed timing. Can be suppressed. Specifically, the analyzed timing is set on a so-called hanging board, a random number is acquired at the timing when a random number value that is a big hit appears, and the fraudulent act of controlling to determine whether the big hit is hit is suppressed. You can

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various setting values related to the gaming state after the jackpot is over (setting values indicating whether or not to be a high probability state of a special symbol, a short time period of a normal symbol, etc.) It is configured not to hold it during the variation pattern presentation during the above or during the subsequent big hit state, but to hold only the offset value that is the value indicating the storage position of each set value in the state setting table 202f. .. Since the RAM 203 does not need to have a storage area for temporarily storing all of the various setting values but only needs to have an area for holding the offset value, the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently. You can

  Next, the state setting table 202f of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. This state setting table 202f (see FIG. 8) is a table in which the gaming state that can be transferred after the end of the big hit is defined for each offset value, and when it is determined that it is the end timing of the big hit (S1207: Yes). It is a data table that is referred to for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end in the jackpot end process (S1208) executed in step S1.

  The state setting table 202f (see FIG. 8) is stored in the range of addresses 1AD4H to 1AF3H of the ROM 202, and 1-byte data is stored at each address. This state setting table 202f (see FIG. 8), information indicating whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends (lottery state of the special symbol), and shifts to the time saving state of the ordinary symbol after the jackpot ends. Information indicating whether or not to make (normal symbol state), the short period of time of the normal symbol that is given after the end of the jackpot (the number of shortened times), and the variation pattern selection table 202d for selecting the mode of the variation pattern after the jackpot. From the table for use, the number of lottery of special symbols required to switch to the table according to the state (the number of times of changing the variation pattern selection table) is defined. Further, in FIG. 8, the address of the ROM 202 where each data is defined is shown in parentheses, but the upper byte of the address of the ROM 202 is omitted and only the lower byte is shown.

  In addition, the information indicating whether or not to shift to the time saving state of the normal symbol (state of the normal symbol) is provided with four types of states of the normal state, the time saving state 1, the time saving state 2, and the time saving state 3. .. If the normal state is set as the state of the normal symbol, the normal symbol shifts to the normal state after the jackpot is over. On the other hand, when any one of the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3 is set, it shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol after the end of the big hit. In addition to these, the four states are different from each other in the tables used for determining the variation pattern after the number of times the variation pattern selection table is switched. That is, when performing the variation pattern effect for the deviation, which of the plurality of tables defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d is used to determine the variation pattern effect is different in the above four states. ing.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the offset value calculated from the offset 1 and the offset 2 defined in the game result setting table 202e based on winning the jackpot is held in the offset value storage area, At the end of the big hit, the set value corresponding to the offset value is extracted from the state setting table 202f and stored in the various set value storage area 203e.

  A random number value (counter value) acquired with the entry into the first entry slot 64 (starting winning) is converted into an offset value and held until the jackpot end time, and the jackpot is awarded based on the offset value. Since it is configured to set the game state after the end, it is possible to limit the period in which the random number value itself which is a big hit of the special symbol is held for a short period. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally obtain a random number value that is a jackpot for a special symbol from outside, analyze the timing when the random number value that is a jackpot appears, and assign the jackpot based on the analyzed timing. Can be suppressed. Specifically, the analyzed timing is set on a so-called hanging board, a random number is acquired at the timing when a random number value that is a big hit appears, and the fraudulent act of controlling to determine whether the big hit is hit is suppressed. You can

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various setting values related to the gaming state after the jackpot is over (the lottery state of the special symbol, the state of the ordinary symbol, the number of times saved and the number of times the variation pattern selection table is switched) before the jackpot game is started. Since it is configured to hold only the offset value, which is a value indicating the storage position of various setting values in the state setting table 202f, rather than being specified and stored in advance in the RAM 203, the RAM 203 has an offset until the end of the jackpot. It is sufficient to provide only the storage area for holding the value. Therefore, the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9, a jackpot end time setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A) and a jackpot end time clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B) defined in the ROM 202 will be described. In order to rewrite these tables in the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 26), the jackpot medium setting values set in various setting value storage areas 203e described later are initialized to the normal game state medium setting. Is a table in which the control data of is defined.

  The jackpot end-time setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A) is a table stored in the range of addresses 1202H to 1204H of the ROM 202, and 1-byte data is stored at each address. Specifically, at each of the addresses “1202H” to “1204H” of the ROM 202, the address data indicating the storage position of the data to be reset in the various set value storage area 203e (see FIG. 7) and the address data are stored. Data for setting to the storage position of the data shown (data for resetting the set value indicating that the jackpot is in progress) and data for ending the process of initializing the game state setting area are stored in the order of addresses. There is. Although details will be described later, in the data setting process (see FIG. 27) which is one process of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 26), the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 sets the jackpot end time setting table 202g (see FIG. )), The stored data is read in the order of the addresses of the ROM 202, and the control according to the stored data is executed. Specifically, when the address data is read, the address is set as the data setting destination address. When the set value data (data for resetting the set value) is read, the contents of the address set as the set destination address are reset (that is, "00H" is set to the set destination address). ). Further, when it is determined that the read data is the data for ending the process, the data setting process (see FIG. 27) is ended.

  Next, the jackpot end-time clear table 202h will be described with reference to FIG. The big hit end clear table 202h is a table stored in the range of the addresses "1205H" to "1212H" of the ROM 202, and each address defines the addresses of various set value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 11). There is. Although details will be described later, in the zero setting process (see FIG. 28), which is one of the jackpot ending processes, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 stores the stored data in the order of the addresses of the ROM 202 from the jackpot end clear table 202h. "00H" (initial value data) is set as a set value to the address indicated by the read stored data (address data). If the data read from the big hit end clear table 202h is "00H", the zero setting process ends.

  The jackpot completion clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B) defines the setting destination address of each setting value storage area 203e and the setting data (that is, "00H") for setting the setting destination address. With such a configuration, there is a problem that the amount of data in the clear table 202h at the end of the jackpot increases. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the processing of defining only the setting destination address in the jackpot completion clear table 202h and setting "00H" to the setting destination address is performed by the control program of the MPU 201. Stipulated in. Therefore, the amount of data in the big hit end clear table 202h can be reduced, so that the amount of data stored in the ROM 202 can be reduced.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a condition for ending the data setting process (see FIG. 27) and the zero setting process (see FIG. 28), the number of times of setting data in the various set value storage areas 203e is set in the control program. "00H" is output from the jackpot end setting table 202g and the jackpot end clear table 202h without setting the processing to end when it is determined that the data has been set for the set number of times. The processing is terminated when it is determined that the data has been read as.

  When the set number of times is described in the control program, the control program designer newly counts the number of set values each time the number of set values changes due to circumstances such as diversion of the program to another model. It is necessary to rewrite the control program according to the counted number. Therefore, in addition to the time and effort required to count the set values, if the designer makes a mistake, the control program will specify an incorrect number of repetitions, so the settings at the end of the jackpot will be completed normally. It may not be possible to cause the pachinko machine 10 to malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is only necessary to define "00H" as data at the end of the jackpot end time setting table 202g and the jackpot end clear table 202h, and therefore, when designing the control program. The possibility that the designer makes a mistake can be reduced. Therefore, the data setting at the end of the jackpot can be executed more reliably based on the control program, so that the malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

  Next, the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters and flags for controlling the processing of the main controller 110, a storage area for storing set values, and the like. Here, with the processing of the main control device 110, special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and third symbol display This is a main process of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting of display in the device 81.

  First, with reference to FIG. 10, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, lottery for special symbols, lottery for ordinary symbols, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37, setting of display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting of display on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform the above.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first per random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for the, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type out of the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used to set the initial value of the first random number counter C1. A counter CINI1 and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern are used. Moreover, the random number counter C4 per second is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the random number counter C4 per second. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 24). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance ball. The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored at the timing of entering the ball 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored at the timing of passing through one of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first per random number table 202a (see FIG. 6A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the per first random number counter C1. When the value matches the value of the random number which is the big hit set by the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined as the big hit of the special symbol. Further, the first random number table 202a is for a low probability of a special symbol (a period of being a low probability state of a special symbol), and at a high probability of a high probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol than at the time of that low probability (special. It is divided into two types, ie, a period for which the symbol has a high probability state), and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed at a low probability of a special symbol and at a high probability of a special symbol. The first random number table 202a1 (not shown) for high probability of special symbols and the first per random number table 202a2 (not shown) for low probability of special symbols are of the main controller 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 149). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 149 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 149), the value returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated regularly (once in each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol hold of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

  Here, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is when the special symbol is removed.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is the one when the special symbol is a big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first random number counter C1, at the time of low probability of the special symbol, there are three random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol, and the random number value "7,107,282" is the first for low probability. It is stored in the hit random number table 202a. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 300, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 3, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is "1/100".

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 30 random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol, and the values are "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 "is a first random number table for high probability time. It is stored in 202a. In this way, at the time of high probability of special symbols, the total number of random number values is 300, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 30, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

  In the present embodiment, the random number value which is a big hit stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability and the random number which is a big hit stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability. Random numbers that are jackpots are set so that they do not overlap with numerical values. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a jackpot random number regardless of the status of the pachinko machine 10, the timing at which the value appears is analyzed, and the jackpot is illegally assigned based on the analyzed timing. It may be easier. On the other hand, like the present embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), the random number value to be a big hit is changed. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to predict a random number value that is a big hit for the special symbol, and thus it is possible to suppress fraud.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 149. Then, as shown in FIG. 6B, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random number value is "0 to 19" is "normal big hit". The jackpot type when the value is "20 to 29" is "hour saving jackpot A", and the jackpot type when the value is "30 to 39" is "hour saving jackpot B". The jackpot type when the value is "40 to 69" is "special jackpot A", and the jackpot type when the value is "70 to 97" is "special jackpot B".

  Further, when the random number value is "98,99", the jackpot type is "probable variation jackpot A", and when the value is "100 to 102", the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B", and the value is When the value is "103 to 105", the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot C", and when the value is "106 to 113", the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot D". In addition, the jackpot type when the value is "114 to 129" is "probable variation jackpot E", and the jackpot type when the value is "130 to 145" is "probable variation jackpot F" and the value is When it is "146, 147", the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot G", and when the value is "148, 149", the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot H".

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment uses 13 types of hit types (normal jackpot, time saving jackpot A, saving time jackpot B, special jackpot A, and special jackpot B) according to the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. , Probability variation big hit A to probability variation big hit H) are determined. From the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2, a random number value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol is set by a special symbol jackpot type table (not shown), and this table is It is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. Stop before and after "rear out of reach" (for example, 98, 99), and after the same reach is reached, the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol "reach other than out of front and rear" (for example, in the range of 90 to 97), Three stop (effect) patterns of "complete disengagement" (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not reach are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball storage in the RAM 203 is stored at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

  From the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value), the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown). This table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a high probability of special symbols and a low probability of special symbols, and a range of random number values set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a special symbol, or the like.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary, so that the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "complete deviation" is 0 to 89, which is a wide table for high probability. Is selected, and it becomes easy to select “completely off”. In this table, the "front-rear outreach" is narrowed to 98,99 and the "reach other than front-rear outreach" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, and it is difficult to select "rear-rear outreach" or "reach other than front-rear-reach". Further, in the low probability state, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the "completely out" stop type is as small as 0 to 79 Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely missed".

  In this stop type selection table, the range of the random number values corresponding to the stop types of "reach other than out-of-front / back" is as wide as 80 to 97, and "reach other than out-of-front-rear" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, since many reach displays having a long effect time can be performed, it is possible to secure a ball entry time into the first entrance 64, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "out-of-front / rear reach" is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach or super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 26) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 6A) storing a random number value for determining one variation time of the symbol variation from the variation type counter CS1 value (random number value) is the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided inside.

  In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, for example, as fluctuation patterns for disconnection, "disconnection (for long time)", "disconnection (for short time)", "disconnection normal reach", "disconnection super reach", "disconnection" Various types of "Special reach" are stipulated, and various types of variation patterns for big hits are defined, such as "normal winning reach", "super reach" types, and "special reach" types. "Various types," shared super reach "types," shared special reach "types are stipulated.

  As described above, the variation pattern selection table 202d is composed of a plurality of tables according to the state of the pachinko machine 10. For example, when the jackpot is won, the tables to be selected differ depending on the jackpot type, and which table is used to select the variation pattern is determined in the game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 7) for each jackpot type. It is determined according to the prescribed table selection information. If the table for selecting the variation pattern is different, for example, among the various types of "hit super reach", the type of "hit super reach" that is easy to select for a particular jackpot type, or "hit super reach" that is selected only for a particular jackpot type A "reach" type can be provided. Therefore, the jackpot type can be predicted from the type of the variation pattern, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, even when the special symbol lottery result is out of place, the table used for selecting the variation pattern is different depending on whether the state of the normal symbol is the normal state or the time saving states 1 to 3. Is configured. With this configuration, it is possible to predict the current gaming state from the type of fluctuation pattern.

  The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed the second entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or the right. It is acquired at the time of being performed and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by the second random number table (see FIG. 6C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. , When it matches the value of the random number which is a hit set by the second hit random number table 202c, it is determined to be a hit of a normal symbol. Further, the second random number table 202c is for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period when the normal symbol is in a normal state), and a high probability that the probability of hitting a normal symbol is higher than the low probability (normal symbol). (For a period of time saving state), and the number of random numbers included in each of which is a big hit is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the ordinary symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 6C, at the time of low probability of the normal symbol, there are 24 random number values that are the hits of the ordinary symbol, and the range thereof is “5 to 28”. These random number values are stored in the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 24, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

  When the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first ball entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for “0.5 seconds × 2 times”.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 200 random numbers that are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the random table per normal symbol for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 200, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is "1 / 1.2".

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 is a normal symbol. Is displayed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for “1 second × 2 times”. In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, compared with the time of low probability of the regular symbol, the time for the variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period is extremely long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. Incidentally, a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit is provided in the ROM 202 from the value of the second hit random number counter C4 (random number value). In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the first entrance 64 is opened for “1 second × 2 times”, but is opened. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main controller 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are selected according to the value of this counter or the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 10, the RAM 203 stores a stack area in which the contents of the register 210 of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

  It should be noted that the RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer when the power is cut off (including the occurrence of a power failure; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register of the register 210. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power-on by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 24) when the power is shut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is performed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 23). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Further, the RAM 203, as shown in FIG. 5, a special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding sphere storing area 203b, a special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d, and various settings. It has a value storage area 203e and a probability variation flag 203f.

  The special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first random number counter C1. , The first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas from the 1st area to the 4th reserved area, the areas having the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the reserved first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbols are selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Then, (moved), based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, the determination such as a lottery for special symbols is performed.

  When data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into the holding area having a smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the holding areas (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize) and each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired in accordance with the starting prize, the original special symbol jackpot lottery Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired respective values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the lottery of the original special symbol is performed, based on the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) corresponding to the start winning, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is performed. Predicting will be described as reading the special symbol lottery result in advance. In addition, as various information, hit / miss, stop type, variation pattern, and the like are applicable.

  Then, when the pre-reading is completed, the winning information command including various information (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp controlling device 113 extracts the win / fail, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command and uses them as winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 223. 223a.

  Like the special symbol holding sphere storing area 203a, the normal symbol holding sphere storing area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right second entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding Among the vacant areas of the (fourth area), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main controller 110, when a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserve ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

  In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the prizes stored in other reserved areas are stored in the same manner as the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed in which data is packed in a reserved area having a smaller area number by one. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, the variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry slot 64 (starting winning) This is a counter for counting the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to 4 times. The initial value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of holding balls in variable display increases, up to a maximum value of 1 They are added (see S604 in FIG. 19). On the other hand, the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 of FIG. 14).

  The value of this special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding number N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (S206 of FIG. 18, see S605 of FIG. 20). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed, and holds the variable display hold ball in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. Thereby, the number of balls for variable display managed by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the number of balls for actual variable display held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated, the deviation can be corrected by the number of reserved balls received next.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the number of holding balls command, and the display holding device for notifying the number of holding balls to the display control device 114 each time the number of holding balls changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the command for number of reserved balls for display.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, the number of holding balls (standby number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67 and the number of holding balls for variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. (See S804 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S705 of FIG. 20).

  When the sphere passes through either the right or left second entrance 67, if the value of this ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d (holding number M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol) is less than 4, a second random number per The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b (S805 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, when the sphere passes through either the right or left second entrance 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Not performed (S803: No in FIG. 21).

  The various set value storage area 203e is a storage area in which various set values, flags, counters and the like for executing main processing of the pachinko machine 10 are stored. The MPU 201 performs control based on the data stored in the various setting value storage area 203e. The various set value storage areas 203e will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various set value storage areas 203e of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 11, the various set value storage area 203e (see FIG. 11) corresponds to the range of addresses “F000H” to “F0FFH” of the RAM 203. In the various set value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 11), the firing control signal set value storage area assigned to the address "F000H" of the RAM 203 stores the set values for controlling the firing of the sphere. This is an area, and the firing of a ball to the game area is controlled based on the set value stored in this area.

  The display LED setting area assigned to the address “F009H” of the RAM 203 is a storage area that stores the setting value of the lighting pattern for turning on the display LED, and is based on the setting value stored in this area. To turn on the display LED.

  The test signal setting area 1 and the test signal setting area 2, which are respectively assigned to the addresses “F01DH” and “F01EH”, are storage areas for storing set values for outputting various test signals. Examples of the test signal include a signal for performing an operation test of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and a signal for performing an operation test at the time of a big hit. Since it is a test signal, a signal is not output while the player is playing a game on the pachinko machine 10 (that is, "00H" is set as a set value in both the test signal setting areas 1 and 2).

  The maximum round number setting area assigned to the address "F030H" is an area for setting the number of rounds per jackpot. For example, if you win a jackpot type with 2 rounds of jackpots, such as the probability variation jackpot E, "02H" is set as the setting value, and the number of jackpots such as special jackpot A or special jackpot B is If you win the jackpot of 8 rounds, the setting value is set to "08H", and if you win the jackpot of 16 rounds such as the normal jackpot and the short-time jackpot A, the setting value is "10H". Is set.

  The game state setting area assigned to the address “F035H” of the RAM 203 is a storage area in which a set value indicating the current game state is stored. For example, if the stored set value is “01H” , Indicates that the special symbol is fluctuating, if "02H" indicates that the special symbol is confirmed and displayed, and if "03H", it is a big hit, and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed. The state is in the state, and if "04H", it means that the jackpot is in the midst of jackpot and the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is in the open state. If it is "00H", it is in a state other than the above (that is, the state from the end of the big hit until the change of the special symbol is started or the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the state where there is no holding ball. The state after a certain time has elapsed) is shown.

  The jackpot flag assigned to the address "F090H" is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot state (special game state) is currently in progress, and if it is on (that is, the stored data is "01H"). If) indicates that the special symbol is in the jackpot, if off (that is, if the stored data is "00H"), a state other than the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, the special symbol) Fluctuation state and a demo state). The storage areas assigned to the subsequent addresses “F091H” to “F094H” are areas for setting the data read from the state setting table 202f of the ROM 202.

  First, the probability variation state flag assigned to the address “F091H” is a flag indicating whether or not the special symbol is currently undergoing probability variation, and if it is on (that is, the stored data is “01H”). If), it indicates that the special symbol is in probable change, and if it is off (that is, if the stored data is "00H"), it indicates that the special symbol has a low probability state. ..

  Further, the time saving state flag assigned to the address "F092H" indicates whether or not the time saving of the normal symbol is in progress, and a set value for designating a table for selecting the mode of the variation pattern at the time of deviation. Is stored. If the flag is "00H", it indicates that the normal symbol is in the normal state, and if the flag is "01H", it indicates that the normal symbol is in the time saving state 1, and if the flag is "02H". For example, it indicates that it is the time saving state 2 of the normal symbol, and if the flag is "03H", it indicates that it is the time saving state 3 of the normal symbol. As described above, the time saving states 1 to 3 of the normal symbols are different in that the tables used for selecting the variation pattern at the time of deviation are different from each other after the variation pattern selection table switching times have passed. .. As described above, all the tables are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d.

  The time saving state counter assigned to the address "F093H" shifts to a low probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot is finished, and when the time shifts to the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, the number of times of saving the ordinary symbol remains. It is a counter that shows whether or not. In addition, when it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot, the time saving state of the normal symbol continues until the next jackpot is won, but the time saving state counter is 0 regardless of the number of lottery of the special symbol. is there. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the probability variation state flag is on or the value of the time saving state counter is 1 or more, control of the time saving state of the normal symbol is executed.

  The fluctuation selection state counter assigned to the address “F094H” is a counter that indicates the number of lottery for the remaining special symbols until the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern effect is switched to another table. If this counter is 1 or more, the dedicated variation pattern selection table after the jackpot is selected as the table for selecting the variation pattern at the time of deviation. On the other hand, when the value of the variation selection state counter is 0, the variation pattern is determined from the table according to the gaming state indicated by the time saving state flag.

  The offset value storage area assigned to the address “F095H” is a storage area for storing the offset value, and the setting value after the jackpot is read from the state setting table 202f based on the stored offset value. , RAM 203 addresses “F091H” to “F094H” are set. This offset value is calculated from the offset 1 and offset 2 values read from the game result table 202e when it is determined to be a big hit in the special symbol lottery, and is stored in the offset value storage area. In addition, the initial value "00H" is overwritten in the reading of the set value from the state setting table 202f and the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) executed after the setting is completed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various random number values (counter values) acquired with the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting winning) are converted into offset values and stored as offset values. Stored in the area and configured to set the gaming state after the jackpot based on the offset value, so the period during which the random number value that is the jackpot of the special symbol itself is held is limited to a short period be able to. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally obtain a random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol from the outside. Therefore, it is possible to analyze the timing at which a random number value that becomes a big hit appears, and to suppress fraudulent acts that illegally assign a big hit based on the analyzed timing. Specifically, the analyzed timing is set on a so-called hanging board, a random number is acquired at the timing when a random number value that is a big hit appears, and the fraudulent act of controlling to determine whether the big hit is hit is suppressed. You can The various random number values (counter values) are the first random number counter C1 and the first random number counter C1 stored in the respective counter buffers of the RAM 203 in association with the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting winning). It means the values of the hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the like.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various setting values to be set in the addresses "F091H" to "F094H" as the gaming state after the jackpot is finished (special symbol lottery state, ordinary symbol state, shortened times, fluctuations) The pattern selection table switching count) is not specified and held in advance before the jackpot game is started, but only the offset value, which is a value indicating the storage position of various setting values in the state setting table 202f, is held. Since the RAM 203 is configured, it is sufficient to provide only the storage area for the offset value storage area of 1 byte in the RAM 203. Therefore, the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently.

  The large opening setting area assigned to the address “F096H” is a storage area in which a setting value indicating the opening pattern of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a during the big hit is stored. Referenced when the jackpot flag is on). The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with five kinds of set values of "00H" to "04H". When the set value is "00H", 16 round jackpots and when "01H", 8 round jackpots. , "02H" is a 16-round short open jackpot (a special winning opening (big open mouth) 65a is open for 0.5 seconds in each round, a 16-round jackpot), and "03H" is a 2-round jackpot. “04H” corresponds to a 2-round short opening jackpot (a 2-round jackpot in which the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened for a maximum of 0.5 seconds in each round).

  The stop symbol code information storage area assigned to the address "F097H" is an area for setting information on the stop symbol of the special symbol based on the lottery result of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out, a stop symbol code indicating the stop symbol corresponding to the out is set, and if the lottery result is a hit, the stop symbol code according to the jackpot type is read from the game result setting table 202e. Issued and set. Then, at the end of the variation of the special symbol, the stop symbol corresponding to the set value set in the stop symbol code information storage area is confirmed and displayed on the first symbol display device 37.

  Addresses "F09FH" to "F0FFH" are unused areas, and the data stored in these areas is fixed to "00H". It should be noted that various setting values are assigned to the addresses other than those described above in the various setting value storage area 203e. Although description is omitted, for example, various counters such as a winning counter that counts the number of balls winning the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and the time for switching the display of the ordinary symbol in the variation effect of the ordinary symbol are measured. Various timers such as a normal symbol display switching timer are assigned.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to centrally store various set values, counters, timers, etc. in the various set value storage area 203e in which the upper byte of the address of the RAM 203 is F0H. A ring buffer for storing a command to be output to the voice lamp control device 113 or the like (for example, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, etc.), a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball number storage area 203b, a stack area For example, the upper byte of the address of the RAM 203 is configured to be stored in an address other than "F0H" (for example, an address whose upper byte is "F1H").

  Next, the register 210 provided in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. The register 210 is for reading the data from the ROM 202 and the RAM 203, temporarily storing the address data and the setting value data when writing the setting value to the RAM 203, and performing the arithmetic processing on the stored setting value. Is. As shown in FIG. 12, the register 210 includes an accumulator 210a capable of executing arithmetic processing on the stored data and a general-purpose register 210b1, 210b2, 210c1, 210c2, 210d1, 210d2 capable of storing address data and setting value data. A flag register 210e for storing various flags, and an address holding register 210f for storing the upper byte (F0H) of the address in the various set value storage area 203e as a fixed value. The accumulator 210a can also be used to temporarily store data, like the general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2.

  Each register provided in the register 210 is configured to be able to hold 1-byte data. Further, the general-purpose register 210b1 and the general-purpose register 210b2, the general-purpose register 210c1 and the general-purpose register 210c2, and the general-purpose register 210d1 and the general-purpose register 210d2 can be used in pairs. That is, the data of 2 bytes in total can be stored in each pair of registers. The data of 2 bytes corresponds to, for example, the address data of the ROM 202, the address data of the RAM 203, and the like.

  The flag register 210e is provided with a different flag for each bit of 1 byte. The provided flag is, for example, a zero flag that is turned off if the operation result after executing the instruction is a value other than zero, and is turned on if it is zero, or data stored in any of the general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2. There is a load flag or the like that turns off when the data is other than "00H" and turns on when the data is "00H".

  The control when reading and writing data will be described below. Here, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with various commands for executing various controls of the main controller 110, and the reading and writing of data is performed by using one of the various commands. Executed by using. Specifically, for example, a transfer instruction is provided that specifies a read source and a setting destination and transfers the data stored in the transfer source to the setting destination.

  In this transfer instruction, at least one of the reading source and the setting destination needs to specify the accumulator 210a provided in the register 210 or one of the general-purpose registers (general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2). is there. Therefore, for example, when the data defined in the address “1ADAH” of the ROM 202 is read and the read data is stored in the address “F093H” of the RAM 203, it is necessary to transfer the data via the general-purpose register 210b1, for example. Specifically, first, the address "1ADAH" is read out, the general-purpose register 210b1 is set as the setting destination, and the data specified by the address "1ADAH" is stored in the general-purpose register 210b1 using a transfer instruction. Then, using the general-purpose register 210b1 as the read source and the address "F093H" as the setting destination, the transfer instruction is performed again to set the data stored in the general-purpose register 210b1 to the address "F093H". By controlling in this way, the data defined in the address “1ADAH” of the ROM 202 can be transferred to the address “F093H” of the RAM 203 via the general-purpose register 210b1.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a 2-byte read instruction (load instruction) is provided as a transfer instruction that the MPU 201 can accept. The 2-byte read instruction (load instruction) is an instruction for reading the data specified by the specified read source and transferring it to the specified setting destination. In the 2-byte read command, the address of the ROM 202 or the RAM 203 can be designated as the reading source or the setting destination. In this case, it is necessary to specify both the upper byte and the lower byte of the addresses of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, like the 2-byte read instruction (load instruction), the 1-byte read instruction is an instruction for reading the data specified by the specified read source and transferring it to the specified setting destination. Instructions are provided. This 1-byte read instruction is different from the 2-byte read instruction (load instruction) in that it is used when reading data from a specific storage area or transferring data to a specific storage area. The specific storage area refers to a storage area in which the fixed value data stored in the address holding register 210f is used as the upper byte of the address. As described above, since "F0H" is stored in the address holding register 210f, the 1-byte read instruction is an area in which the address is in the range of "F000H" to "F0FFH", that is, various set value storage areas of the RAM 203. It is used when data is transferred to 203e, or conversely, when data is read from various set value storage areas 203e.

  Since the 1-byte read instruction is defined to include reading and writing from the area where the upper byte of the address is "F0H", the upper byte of the address is specified when the read source address or the setting destination address is specified. It is sufficient to omit the bytes and describe only the lower byte of the address in the program, which has the advantage of reducing the program capacity.

  Here, when various settings such as the setting at the start of fluctuation, the setting during big hit, the setting after end of big hit, and the like are set, data is set in the various set value storage area 203e. Therefore, in the control program, the frequency of describing the process of setting some data in the various set value storage area 203e increases. If all these settings are described by a 2-byte read instruction, there is a problem that the program capacity increases. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the MPU 201 is configured to be able to read the above-mentioned 1-byte read instruction, and further, the upper bytes of the addresses of the various set value storage areas 203e are all "F0H". As described above, the data storage position of the RAM 203 is adjusted. As a result, a command for setting data to the various set value storage areas 203e, which is frequently set during the game by the pachinko machine 10, can be described by a 1-byte read command in the control program. Therefore, when there are a plurality of upper bytes of the address in the various set value storage area 203e (for example, some data are stored in the area where the upper byte of the address is “F0H”, and some data have the upper byte of the address). It is possible to reduce the capacity of the control program as compared with the case of being stored in the "F1H" area).

  Here, the difference between the 2-byte read instruction and the 1-byte read instruction will be described more specifically, taking as an example the case where the data stored in the general-purpose register 210b1 is stored in the address “F093H” of the RAM 203.

  In the 2-byte read instruction, the data stored in the general-purpose register 210b1 is set to the address "F093H" by designating the data indicating the general-purpose register 210b1 as the reading source and further designating the address "F093H" as the setting destination. can do. That is, in one transfer instruction, it is necessary to describe in the program a total of 3 bytes of 1-byte data indicating the general-purpose register 210b1 and 2-byte address data “F093H”.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte read instruction is used, the data indicating the general register 210b1 is designated as the read source in common with the 2-byte read instruction, but the lower byte of the address "F093H" is set as the setting destination. The difference is that only a certain "93H" needs to be specified. That is, in one transfer instruction, it is sufficient to describe a total of 2 bytes of data including 1-byte data indicating the general-purpose register 210b1 and 1-byte address data "93H". Compared to this, the program description amount can be reduced by 1 byte. Further, in the various set value storage area 203e, various set values related to the game are stored, such as set values related to ball firing, set values related to the LED 37a, and set values for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. Data is read and written frequently. Therefore, in the control program of the pachinko machine 10, the description of the transfer command that designates any address in the various set value storage areas 203e as the read source or the set destination frequently appears. Therefore, the program capacity can be reduced by using the 1-byte read instruction instead of the 2-byte read instruction for all of these transfer instructions.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the various set value storage areas 203e in which data is frequently set are configured so that the upper byte of the address in the RAM 203 falls within the range of "F0H". Therefore, “F0H” is selected as the higher address of the read source or the setting destination when the 1-byte read instruction is executed in a form matching with this, but the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, the addresses of the various setting value storage areas 203e are set to "FF00H" to "FFFFH", and in accordance therewith, "FFH" is set as the read source or the higher address of the setting destination when the 1-byte read instruction is executed. May be selected. Note that when changing the upper address of the reading source or the setting destination to “FFH”, “FFH” may be stored as fixed value data in the address holding register 202f.

  Further, for example, in the ROM 202, the upper byte of an address that is frequently read is set as the upper address of the reading source or the setting destination when the 1-byte read instruction is executed (that is, a fixed value in the address holding register 202f). It may be set as data). As the frequently read address, for example, the address of the first random number table 202a that is referred to each time the special symbol is drawn, or the game result setting table 202e that is referred to each time when the special symbol is determined to be a big hit Address.

  In the above example, when the upper byte of the address of the game result setting table 202e is stored as fixed value data, the game result setting table 202e is stored in the addresses "19D1H" to "1A2BH" of the ROM 202. When reading data, there are cases where the upper byte of the address is “19H” and cases where it is “1AH”. On the other hand, since only one byte of data can be stored in the address holding register 202f, only one of "19H" and "1AH" can be stored in the address holding register 202f. On the other hand, the game result setting table 202e may be configured so that the addresses of the ROM 202 defined therein are shifted so that all the data are defined within a range in which the upper byte of the address is common.

  Further, according to the game state to be changed, the upper byte of the address is configured to set a set value in a different storage area, and the target area when executing the 1-byte transfer instruction is changed according to the game state. You may comprise. For example, in the various setting value storage areas 203e, the setting value for setting the gaming state during jackpot is stored in the range where the upper byte of the address is "F0H", and the gaming state after the jackpot is finished is set. The set value is stored in the range where the upper byte of the address is “F1H”. Then, when setting the gaming state during the jackpot, the fixed value "F0H" is overwritten in the address holding register 202f, and the data is read and written from the area where the upper byte of the address is "F0H" in the 1-byte read instruction. It should be set so that On the other hand, at the end of the big hit, when setting the gaming state after the end of the big hit, the fixed value "F1H" is overwritten in the address holding register 202f, and the upper byte of the address in the 1-byte read instruction reads and writes data from the area of "F1H". It should be set so that As a result, the data stored in the various set value storage areas 203e increases, and even if all the data cannot fit in the area where the upper byte of the address is the same, the 1-byte read instruction is used. Therefore, the program capacity can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via an input / output port 205. To send.

  Further, the input / output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processing is executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch handle 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). Display) and continuous notice effects such as setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 are controlled. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the situation of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern table 222a that defines a plurality of variation pattern effects to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the fluctuation pattern command output from main controller 110 is received, the mode of the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected from this fluctuation pattern table 222a. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, and a stop type selection flag 223d.

  The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and prize information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control unit 110 has a start prize, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize. From, from the main control unit 110, various information (win / fail, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated), and the various predicted information is The main controller 110 notifies the voice lamp controller 113 by a prize information command.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the winning information command is received, various information notified by the winning information command (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is changed to the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) in the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). To be done. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol reservation sphere number counter 223b, like the special symbol reservation sphere counter 203c of the main controller 110, is a variable effect (variation display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effect pending in the main controller 110 up to a maximum of four times.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the holding number of holding balls is managed by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b. Is becoming

  Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first ball inlet 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main controller 110. When the number of holding balls is subtracted, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c of the main control device 110 is acquired from the holding ball number command, The number is stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1808 in FIG. 31). In this way, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is updated according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is used to display the holding ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b after storing. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, the display holding ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  In the display control device 114, when receiving the display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball number for the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b is changed in value in synchronization with the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere numbers displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1802 in FIG. 31), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 32). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1702) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1805 in FIG. 31), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1907 in FIG. 32). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is set based on the stop type (the big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command, and the set stop type is displayed. The stop control command notifies the display controller 114.

  In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display of the variable effect is controlled.

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 31) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (fluctuation) (Production) is controlled.

  The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. From the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 13 to 28. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started regularly (in this embodiment, at an interval of 2 msec). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a regular process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first random type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, as a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104), and then The starting winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) into the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19.

  After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for displaying in the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S106), and the through-gate passage accompanying the passage of the ball in the second entrance 67 is performed. The process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21. After the through-gate passage processing is executed, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and other processing that should be executed periodically is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a and that the hit switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated, and the ball is fired. Is a process for determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device. This is processing for controlling the variable display of the third symbol and the like performed at 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is now determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As during the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the big hit of the special symbol (including the big hit game of the special symbol), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  If the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c (holding number N of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205), and changed by calculation. A reserved sphere number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved sphere number counter 203c is set (S206). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

  After setting the reserved ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After the data is shifted, a jackpot determination process is performed to perform a lottery to determine whether or not a special symbol is a jackpot based on the data shifted to the execution area (S208). The jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. Yes (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time If has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The stop symbol is set in advance by a jackpot setting process (S308) described later with reference to FIG. 16 or an outlier setting process (S309) described later with reference to FIG.

  After the processing of S210 is finished, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot of the special symbol (S211: Yes), the jackpot start corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S212).

  In the processing of S211, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving state counter stored in the various set value storage area 203e is 1 or more (S213). If the value of the time saving state counter is 1 or more (S213: Yes), the value of the time saving medium state counter is decremented by 1 (S214), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving state counter is 0 (S213: No), the process of S214 is skipped and this process ends.

  Next, the jackpot determination processing (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the big hit determination process (S208). This jackpot determination process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 14) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and is stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a. Based on the value of the various counters, the lottery of "special symbol big hit" or "out of special symbol" (judgment) is performed, and fluctuations performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. It is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the effect.

  In the jackpot determination process, first, from the first hit random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202, select the first hit random number table 202a2 (not shown) for low probability, and determine whether it is a special symbol big hit or not. (S301). After that, the probability variation state flag stored in the various set value storage areas 203e is read (S302), and it is determined whether or not the probability variation state flag indicates a high probability state of the special symbol (S303).

  As a result of the process of S303, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the high probability state (S303: Yes), the first per random number table 202a1 stored in the ROM 202 is used for the high probability first per random number table 202a1. (Not shown) is read, as a table for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit, it is newly set instead of the first random number table 202a2 for low probability (S304), and the process proceeds to S305. To do. On the other hand, as a result of the process of S303, when it is determined that the special symbol is not in the high-probability state (that is, the special symbol is in the low-probability state) (S303: No), the process of S304 is skipped and the process proceeds to S305. To do.

In the process of S305, the value of the first random number counter C1 is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 203 (S305), the read value of the first random number counter C1 and S
301 or a table (comparison source table) for determining whether or not the special symbol set in the processing of S304 is a big hit (S306).

  As described above, in the first random number table 202a1 (not shown) for high probability, as a random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, “4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78 , 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 ”are set. In the low-probability first random number table 202a2 (not shown), three random numbers "7, 107, 282" are set as the random numbers that are special jackpots. In the process of S306, the random number values defined in the table set as the comparison source table among these tables and the value of the first random number counter C1 are compared one by one.

  Based on this comparison, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 matches any random number value defined in the comparison source table (S307), and the matching random number value. If there is (that is, in the case of a big hit of the special symbol), the big hit time setting process for setting the mode of the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit and the control during the big hit are executed (S308), and the process proceeds to S310. To do. On the other hand, when there is no matching random number value in the process of S307 (that is, when the special symbol is out), the out-of-phase setting process for setting the mode of the variation pattern at the time of out-of-step is executed (S309), The process proceeds to S310. Details of the jackpot setting process (S308) and the out-of-range setting process (S309) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18.

  Next, in the process of S310, various counter values stored in the counter buffer are cleared (S310), and this process ends. Since various counter values are cleared in the process of S310, even in the case of a big hit, it is possible to clear the random number value (counter value) to be a big hit before the big hit state is started. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally obtain a random number value that is a jackpot for a special symbol from outside, analyze the timing when the random number value that is a jackpot appears, and assign the jackpot based on the analyzed timing. Can be suppressed. Specifically, the analyzed timing is set on a so-called hanging board, a random number is acquired at the timing when a random number value that is a big hit appears, and the fraudulent act of controlling to determine whether the big hit is hit is suppressed. You can In the present embodiment, various counter values stored in the counter buffer are cleared in the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 15), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot state for the player is set. You should clear it before you realize that it will be. Therefore, for example, the process of clearing the counter buffer may be executed during the variation effect, before the stop of the symbol, or the like.

  In this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the special symbol is in the high probability state, the process of S301 is configured to once set the first random number table for low probability time, which is early. This is to set a table for comparison. That is, when any first random number table (the first random number table 202a1 for high probability or the first random number table 202a2 for low probability) is not set, the influence of noise or the like Even if there occurs a problem that the processes of S303 and S304, which are intermediate processes, are skipped due to the big hit, based on the first winning random number table 202a2 for low probability set at the beginning of the big hit determination processing, Whether it is right or wrong can be determined.

  Next, the jackpot setting process (S308) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the jackpot time setting process is a process for setting the mode of the variation pattern during the jackpot and the control during the jackpot.

  In this process, first, the jackpot flag of the various set value storage areas 203e is set to ON (S401), and then the value of the first hit type counter C2 is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and the jackpot of the jackpot that has been won this time. The type is specified (S402). Specifically, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 is specified based on the first jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 6B). For example, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80", the counter value is within the range of "70" to "97", and thus the jackpot type of this time is specified as the special jackpot B. Further, for example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "140", the counter value is within the range of "130" to "145", and thus the jackpot type of this time is specified as the probability variation jackpot F.

  Next, the set value corresponding to the specified jackpot type is read from the game result setting table 202e of the ROM 202, and the read set value is set in the corresponding storage area of the various set value storage areas 203e of the RAM 203 (S403). The process proceeds to S404. Here, as the setting value to be read from the game result setting table 202e and set in the various setting value storage area 203e, the lighting pattern of the LED 37a (the number of display symbols), information indicating the stop symbol of the special symbol (stop symbol code), , Information for specifying a table for selecting the mode of the fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (table selection information), and a control pattern for the special winning opening (large opening) 65a (large opening pattern) Etc.

  As described above, when the setting value data is read from the ROM 202 and set in the RAM 203, first, the transfer source address data and the setting destination address data are stored in one of the general-purpose registers of the register 210. Store temporarily. Then, the setting value data read from the ROM 202 based on the stored data of the transfer source address is temporarily stored in one of the general purpose registers in which the address data is not stored, and then the setting destination address is stored. The setting value is transferred (set) to the address of the RAM 203 indicated by the data. In the process of S403, the transfer control via the register 210 is repeated by the number of set value data to be transferred.

  In the process of S402, the jackpot type is specified from the random number value (counter value), and in the process of S403, various set values are determined based on the identified jackpot type. However, the range of the random number value (counter value) And various setting values may be directly associated and defined. That is, a table defining the range of random number values (counter values) and corresponding various setting values may be provided in the ROM 202, and the setting value may be directly specified from the random number value by referring to this table. .

  In the process of S404, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and compared with the table specified based on the table selection information to select the mode of the fluctuation pattern (S404). Then, the variation pattern command based on the selected variation pattern mode is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S405). The fluctuation pattern command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 24) described later that is executed by the MPU 201.

  After setting the variation pattern, a game result setting acquisition process, which is a process for acquiring and setting offset information that is information for setting the gaming state after the jackpot is finished, is executed at the end of the jackpot (S406), This process ends.

  Subsequently, the game result setting acquisition process (S406) will be described with reference to FIG. The game result setting acquisition process (S406) is a process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, and is a process for holding an offset value based on the lottery result of the special symbol in the RAM 203.

  In the game result setting acquisition process (S406), first, the value of offset 1 based on the present jackpot type is read from the game result setting table 202e and set as an offset value (S501). The term "set as an offset value" here means that the value of offset 1 or offset 2 read from the game result setting table 202e of the ROM 202 is temporarily stored in the accumulator 210a. Further, in the processing of S501, the value of the offset 1 is stored in the accumulator 210a without being stored in any of the general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2. This is because arithmetic processing is performed on the value.

  Similarly, the value of offset 2 based on the jackpot type of this time is read from the game result setting table 202e and stored in one of the general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2 (S502). After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour-shortening state counter is 0 (that is, whether or not the jackpot this time is the one that was won during the hour-shortening state of the ordinary symbol that is given after winning the various hour-and-hour jackpots). (S503).

  In the processing of S503, when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter is not 0 (S503: No), the value of offset 2 stored in any of the general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2 is stored in the accumulator 210a. The existing data is overwritten (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S503 that the value of the time saving state counter is 0 (S503: Yes), the process of S504 is skipped and the process proceeds to S505.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, depending on whether or not to win during the time saving state of the ordinary symbols given after various time saving / hits, the jackpot type (special jackpot A, special jackpot B) that shifts to a different game state after the jackpot ends. ) Is provided. Specifically, if the special jackpot A or the special jackpot B is won during the time saving state of the ordinary symbol that is given after various time saving jackpots, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot. On the other hand, if the special jackpot A or the special jackpot B is won in any other state, the special symbol shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot and shifts to the normal symbol time saving state. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the offset 1 or the offset 2 is defined in association with each of the two game states that can be transferred after the jackpot is over.

  In the process of S505, it is determined whether or not there is a high probability state of the special symbol (S505), and when it is determined that the high probability state of the special symbol (S505: Yes), the offset stored in the accumulator 210a. An arithmetic process is performed to switch the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits of the value (S506), and the process proceeds to S507. On the other hand, in the process of S505, when it is determined that the special symbol is not in the high-probability state (that is, the special symbol is in the low-probability state) (S505: No), the process of S506 is skipped and the process proceeds to S507. To do.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a jackpot type (hour-short jackpot A) in which the number of times of saving and shortening of a normal symbol given after the jackpot is different is provided depending on whether or not to win during a high probability state of a special symbol. Specifically, when the short-time jackpot A is won during the high-probability state of the special symbol, the normal symbol time-saving state is set from the end of the big hit until the special symbol is drawn 30 times. If you win the short-time jackpot A during the low probability state of the special symbol, the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set only after the jackpot is completed and until the special symbol is drawn 20 times. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the upper 4 bits or the lower 4 bits of the offset value are defined in association with each of the two game states that can be transferred after the jackpot is over.

  In the processing of S507, the lower 4 bits of the offset value stored in the accumulator 210a are extracted and stored in the offset value storage area of the various set value storage areas 203e provided in the RAM 203 (S507), and this processing is executed. finish. Here, “extracting the lower 4 bits” means taking the logical product of the data stored in the accumulator 210a and “0FH”. Regardless of the value of the upper 4 bits of the data stored in the accumulator 210a, the upper 4 bits are "0H" (that is, "0000B" by performing a logical product with "0FH" (that is, "000011111B"). )), Only the lower 4 bits of the data stored in the accumulator 210a remain.

  The offset value stored in the offset value storage area of the various setting value storage area 203e in the process of S507 is held until the jackpot end timing, and is a process for setting a state after the jackpot end process (FIG. 26). ), The data to be read from the state setting table 202f is determined.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a random number value (counter value) acquired with the entry into the first entry slot 64 (start prize) is converted into an offset value and stored in the offset value storage area. Since it is configured to set the gaming state after the jackpot is finished based on the offset value, it is possible to limit the period in which the random number value which is the jackpot of the special symbol is held for a short period. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally obtain a random number value that is a jackpot for a special symbol from outside, analyze the timing when the random number value that is a jackpot appears, and assign the jackpot based on the analyzed timing. Can be suppressed. Specifically, the analyzed timing is set on a so-called hanging board, a random number is acquired at the timing when a random number value that is a big hit appears, and the fraudulent act of controlling to determine whether the big hit is hit is suppressed. You can

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various setting values to be set in the addresses F091H to F094H as the gaming state after the jackpot is finished (the special symbol lottery state, the ordinary symbol state, the number of time reductions, and the variation pattern selection table switching). Since the number of times) is not specified and held in advance before the jackpot game is started, only the offset value, which is a value indicating the storage position of various setting values in the state setting table 202f, is held. The RAM 203 only needs to be provided with a storage area of 1 byte for the offset value storage area. Therefore, the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of offset 1 is stored in the accumulator 210a in the process of S501, and the value of offset 2 is stored in any of the general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2 in the process of S502. However, the value of offset 1 and the value of offset 2 are stored in either pair register (general-purpose register 210b1 and general-purpose register 210b2, general-purpose register 210c1 and general-purpose register 210c2, or general-purpose register 210d1 and general-purpose register 210d2). It may be stored in a batch. Then, if it is determined in the processing of S503 that the time saving state counter is 0 (S503: Yes), the value of offset 1 stored in the pair register may be stored in the accumulator 210a.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the offset 2 is temporarily stored in one of the general-purpose registers before the value of the time saving state counter is determined to be 0. When it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter is not 0 (S503: No), the value of the offset 2 may be stored. As a result, when the time saving state counter is 0 (S503: Yes), not only the processing of S504 but also the processing corresponding to the processing of S502 can be omitted, so that the processing load can be reduced. .

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of offset 2 stored in one of the general-purpose registers is not erased by the processing of S502, but it is stored in the general-purpose register before the processing of S505, for example. The offset 2 value may be deleted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning by mistakenly referring to the general-purpose register in which the value of the offset 2 is stored in another process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, in the jackpot determination process (S208), the out-of-range setting process (S309) executed when the current lottery result is determined to be out of the special symbol will be described.

  In the out-of-range setting process, first, a table used for determining the variation pattern is specified (S501). Specifically, one of the plurality of tables defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d is identified by referring to the state of the time saving state flag in the various set value storage area 203e and the counter value of the variation selection state counter. To do. As described above, if the counter value of the variation selection state counter is not 0, a dedicated table is selected after the jackpot. On the other hand, if the counter value of the fluctuation selection state counter is 0, the table corresponding to the state of the time saving state flag is selected.

  After the processing of S501 is finished, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 203 (S502), and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern is calculated based on the read value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the table selected in the processing of S501. A mode is selected (S503). Then, the variation pattern command based on the selected variation pattern mode is set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S504), and this processing ends. The fluctuation pattern command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 24) described later that is executed by the MPU 201.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 19, the start winning processing (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), determines whether or not there is a winning (starting prize) in the first ball entrance 64, and if there is a starting prize. Is a process for executing a process for holding the value indicated by each random number counter.

  When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S601). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S601: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding number N of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S602). It is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S603).

  Whether there is no prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c must be less than 4. If (S603: No), this process is terminated and returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first ball entrance 64 (S601: Yes), and the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the special symbol holding ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S605).

  The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

  After the number of reserved balls command is set by the process of S605, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated by the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are set. , Is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S606). In the process of S606, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Then, based on the various counter values stored in the process of S606, the winning / non-winning of the lottery in the special symbol (whether or not it is a jackpot), its stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot), and its variation pattern are predicted. Yes (S607). Here, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is one of the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the processing of S606 and the random number value (hit value) stored in the first random number table 202a. It is determined by comparing one. As described above, the random number value that is a big hit for the special symbol at the time of high probability of the special symbol is stored in the first random number table 202a1 for high probability, "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52. , 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 ". The random number value which is 30 and is a big hit of the special symbol at the time of low probability of the special symbol is stored in the first random number table 202a2 for low probability, and is three of "7, 107, 282". ..

  Further, whether the current is the low probability state of the special symbol or the high probability state of the special symbol is determined by referring to the probability change state flag stored in the various set value storage area 203e. Specifically, if the probability variation state flag is on, it is a high probability state of the special symbol, and if the probability variation state flag is off, it is a low probability state of the special symbol. In the process of S607, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value stored in the first random number table 202a corresponding to the state of the probability variation state flag, and if these values match, a special Judged as a jackpot for the design.

  When it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the process of S606 and the random number value stored in the special symbol big hit type table are compared, Of the 13 types of special symbol jackpots (normal jackpot, short-time jackpot A, hour-short jackpot B, special jackpot A, special jackpot B, probability variation jackpot A to probability variation jackpot H), which jackpot category is determined. As described above, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 is identified by referring to the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 6B).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment, based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the process of S606, as the stop type displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the front / rear detachment reach is performed. It is determined whether it is a reach, a reach other than the front / back deviation, or a complete deviation. Here, if the probability variation state flag is on, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the process of S606 is compared with the random number value stored in the high probability probability stop type selection table, Determine the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", it is determined to be a complete deviation, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", it is determined to be a reach other than the front / rear deviation. However, if it is “98, 99”, it is determined that the reach is out of front and rear. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203e is off, the stop type is determined by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", it is determined to be out of alignment, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", it is determined to be reach other than out of front / back. However, if it is “98, 99”, it is determined that the reach is out of front and rear.

  Next, the variation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. The variation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is a variation pattern selection table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202, and a predicted lottery result and a predicted stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big hit). It is selected according to. In the fluctuation pattern table, for example, as fluctuation patterns for disconnection, "disconnection (for long time)", "disconnection (for short time)", "disconnection normal reach", "disconnection super reach", "disconnection special reach", etc. “Various normal reach” types, “hit super reach” types, “hit special reach” types are defined as variation patterns for big hits, and “shared normal reach” types , "Shared super reach" and "shared special reach" are stipulated. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, a fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

  By the processing of S607, whether or not the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (the big hit type in the case of a big hit), and the variation pattern are predicted, then, whether or not the predicted lottery is won and the predicted stop type, The prize information command including the predicted variation pattern is set (S608), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13).

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 20, a normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83, and is associated with the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S701). As the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hitting, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory which accompanies the first entrance 64 is made while the indication indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S701: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S704: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is not 0 (S704: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d (S705).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is acquired (S707).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol (S708). Specifically, if the value of the time saving state counter stored in the various set value storage areas 203e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or if the probability variation state flag is on, it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is present. .

  In the process of S708, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S709). As during the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the big hit of the special symbol (including the big hit game of the special symbol), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to hit. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to make it win the specific winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first winning opening 64 is opened. This is to prevent the ball, which is about to win the specific winning opening 65a, from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. Since the specific winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening 64 is prevented from entering the first winning opening 64 during the big hit of the special symbol. Many balls enter the ball entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first ball inlet 64 becomes maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state.

  In the process of S709, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit, and since the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is acquired in the process of S707. Based on the value of the second per random number counter C4 and the random number per ordinary symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S710). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", Usually it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 6C).

  In the process of S708, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, the normal state of the normal symbol) (S708: No), the process proceeds to S711. In the process of S711, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S707 and the low value. Based on the random symbol per ordinary symbol for probability, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is hit is acquired (S711). Specifically, the value of the second per random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", Usually it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 6C).

  Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S710 or S711, it is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol hit (S712), when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S712: Yes) , The display mode of winning is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state.

  Then, it is determined whether or not it is the time saving state of the normal symbol (S714), and if it is determined as the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S714: Yes), whether or not the special symbol is currently a big hit. Is determined (S715). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is a big hit (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to prevent the ball from entering the first ball entrance 64 as much as possible, even if it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case of the deviation of the ordinary symbol. The number of times the electric accessory is opened and the opening time are set.

  In the process of S715, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, so the first entrance The opening period of the electric accessory accompanying 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S716), and the process proceeds to S719. In the process of S714, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, the normal state of the normal symbol) (S714: No), the process proceeds to S717. In the process of S717, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is 0. .. is set to 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S717), and the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S712, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S712: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S718). In the process of S718, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be lit up as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S719, it is determined whether or not it is a time saving state of the normal symbol (S719), and when it is determined that it is a time saving state of the normal symbol (S719: Yes), the variable display of the second symbol display device 83 The fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S720), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, the normal state of the normal symbol) (S719: No), the variation time of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds ( S721), and this processing ends. In this way, except when the special symbol big hit, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", further, The opening period of the first entrance 64 is extremely long, which is “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, so that the ball easily enters the first entrance 64.

  In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Yes (S722). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S720 or the process of S721 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the processing of S722, if the variation time has not elapsed (S722: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S722, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S723). In the process of S723, the lottery for the normal symbols is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S713, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit up) on the second symbol display device 83. Display) is set. On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbols is missed and the display mode is set by the process of S718, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set. By the process of S723, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S1107) of the main process (see FIG. 24) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The display is set to end in the processing of S713 or the processing of S718, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83.

  Next, when the variable display being executed is started in the second symbol display device 83, the lottery result of the normal symbol (this time lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S724). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S724: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set (S725), and this processing is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the processing of S725, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing processing (see S1105) of the main processing (see FIG. 24) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 13), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, and if the ball has passed, This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through-gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S801). Here, the passage of a ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S802). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S803).

  Whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (S803: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, the ball passes through the second entrance 67 (S801: Yes), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. This area is stored in the area (S805), and this processing ends. In the process of S805, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S901), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

  Note that the NMI interrupt process described above is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup processing is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1001). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Next, a wait process (1 second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable. (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004), and if it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if it is not stored (S1005: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, the process proceeds to S1012 also in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, the process proceeds to S912. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the process of S1114 of FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S1010.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S1007: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S1008). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 can start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1010, the production permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various productions. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S1011), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1101 to S1107 is executed as a regular process of 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating process of S1110 and S1111 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 13), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is output to each sub-side control device (peripheral). The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1101). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 13) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls acquired to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the reserved symbol number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 14) and the starting winning process (see FIG. 19) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 19) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1104). Here, the jackpot state of the special symbol, specifically, it is determined that the variation time of the variation pattern effect that is a jackpot has elapsed, after the start of the jackpot is set, the end of the set jackpot Refers to the period until setting. In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S1105). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 20), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1106). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S405 of the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 16) or the process of S504 of the out-of-range setting process (see FIG. 17), the variation pattern The variable display according to is started on the first symbol display device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the variation time elapses after the variation is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED. If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, each time a main process is executed, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 so that the player can confirm the change of the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S405 of the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 16) or the process of S504 of the out-of-range setting process (see FIG. 17). When is ended, the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is ended, and the process of S404 of the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 16) or the out-of-range setting process (see FIG. 17) of S503. In the display mode set by the process of 1, the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the first symbol display device 37.

  Next, the second symbol display updating process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1107). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 or the process of S721 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 20), the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S723 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 20), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is ended, and in the display mode set by the process of S713 or the process of S718 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 20), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83. (Lit display).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108), and if the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1109). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1109: Yes), the process proceeds to S1101 and the above-described processes after S1101 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1109: No), the first time is reached during the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1110, S1111).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1110). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are respectively stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1102 (S1111).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1101 to S1107 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

  Further, in the process of S1108, if the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 22 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1112 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1112), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1113). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1114), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1115), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

  The processing of S1108 is at the timing of the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1101 to S1107, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. It can be started from the process of S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the power-off process, the stack pointer is By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1101 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control processing (S1104). This jackpot control processing (S1104) is executed in the main interrupt processing (see FIG. 24), when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a specific winning prize. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1201). As during the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the big hit of the special symbol (including the big hit game of the special symbol), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1201, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S1201: No), this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if the special symbol is a big hit (1201: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1202). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1202: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1203), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1204). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The number-of-rounds command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp is used. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1201: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1205). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds or 0.5 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or when opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a When a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10) are won after the ball is opened, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S1205, if the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1205: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1206), and this processing ends. To do. On the other hand, when the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1205: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the big hit (S1207).

  In the process of S1207, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1207: Yes), the set value corresponding to the gaming state after the jackpot end is set and the set value for the jackpot is reset. The jackpot end process is executed (S1208), the gaming state after the jackpot is ended is set, and this process is ended. Although details will be described later, in the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 26), the jackpot flag is initialized (“00H” is set) together with the other setting values in jackpot. Therefore, even when the power of the gaming machine is suddenly turned off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, it is possible to prevent only the jackpot flag from being turned off and the other setting values from being set to the jackpot.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the final round of the big hit, after the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening mouth) 65a is established, the ending effect for notifying the player of the end of the big hit is set. It In the process of S1205, when it is determined that the ending timing of the set ending effect has been set (the effect time set for executing the ending effect has elapsed), it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot.

  The end timing of the jackpot is not necessarily limited to the end timing of the ending effect. For example, in the final round of jackpot, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (big opening) 65a is established, it may be configured to shift to the jackpot ending process (S1208) as the jackpot ending timing. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26 to FIG. 28, the jackpot end processing (S1208) executed in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 25) by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. As described above, this jackpot ending process (S1208) is a process for setting a setting value corresponding to the gaming state after the jackpot is over and resetting the setting value for jackpot.

  In the jackpot ending process (S1208), first, the state setting table 202f is read from the ROM 202 (S1301). As used herein, "read" means that the upper byte (1AH) and the lower byte (D4H) of the start address (1AD4H) of the state setting table 202f are used as address data for any pair of general-purpose registers (for example, general-purpose registers). 210b1 and general-purpose register 210b2).

  Next, in the game result set value acquisition process (see FIG. 17) executed before the big hit this time is started, it is stored in advance in the offset value storage area of the various set value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 11). The offset value is stored in the accumulator 210a. Since the upper byte (F0H) of the address in the various set value storage area 203e (see FIG. 11) is the value stored as fixed value data in the address holding register 210f, the offset value is read using the 1-byte read instruction. be able to. That is, the lower byte (95H) of the address in the offset value storage area is designated as the read source (transfer source) and the accumulator 210a is designated as the setting destination, and the 1-byte read instruction causes the offset value storage area to be the read source (transfer source). The stored offset value is read out and transferred to the accumulator 210a which is the setting destination.

  By using the 1-byte read instruction, it is not necessary to describe the upper byte (F0H) of the address of the offset value storage area in the control program, so the program capacity can be reduced.

  Next, a calculation process of multiplying the offset value stored in the accumulator 210a by 4 is performed (S1303). The value of 4 is the number of types of data defined in the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 8) as the setting value after the jackpot is over. That is, four kinds of set values of the special symbol lottery state, the state of the ordinary symbol, the time saving number, and the variation pattern selection mode switching number are defined in the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 8).

  As shown in parentheses in FIG. 8, in the state setting table 202f, from the side having a smaller address value, the special symbol lottery state corresponding to the offset value 00H, the state of the ordinary symbol, the number of time reductions, and the variation pattern selection mode switching number , Special symbol lottery state corresponding to offset 01H, state of normal symbol, time saving, number of times of changing pattern selection mode, ..., lottery state of special symbol corresponding to offset 07H, state of normal symbol, time saving number, The data is stored in the order of the number of times the variation pattern selection mode is switched. In other words, the set value corresponding to the offset value that is incremented by 1 is stored every time the address value increases by 4. Therefore, the value obtained by multiplying the offset value by 4 becomes the difference (offset) between the start address of the state setting table 202f and the storage address of the data corresponding to the current offset value. In the processing of S1303, the difference (offset) of the address with respect to the head address of this state setting table 202f is obtained.

  When the process of S1303 ends, the difference between the address value set in the pair of general-purpose registers (for example, the general-purpose register 210b1 and the general-purpose register 210b2) in the process of S1301 with respect to the start address of the state setting table 202f calculated in the process of S1302 (Offset) is added, and the added address is set as the address of the data transfer source (read source) (S1304).

  Next, the address where the probability variation state flag of the various set value storage area 203e is stored is set as the setting destination address (S1305), and the data stored in the transfer source address set in the processing of S1304 is set as the setting destination address. Is transferred (S1306).

  After that, it is determined whether or not all the four types of data defined in the state setting table 202f have been transferred to the various setting value storage areas 203e (S1307), and the transfer has not been completed (that is, the untransferred data type is If it is determined (exists) (S1307: No), 1 is added to the transfer source (read source) address, the data specified by the added address is read (S1308), and further 1 is set to the setting destination address. After the addition, the data read in the process of S1308 is stored in the address after the addition (S1309). Then, returning to the processing of S1307, it is determined again whether or not all the four types of data defined in the state setting table 202f have been transferred to the various set value storage areas 203e (S1307). That is, the processes of S1307 to S1309 are repeated until all four types of data defined in the state setting table 202f are transferred to the various setting value storage area 203e.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1307, when it is determined that all four types of data defined in the status setting table 202f have been transferred to the various set value storage area 203e (S1307: Yes), the various set value storage areas 203e are set. The state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the set state is set (S1310), the process for clearing the jackpot setting value (S1311 to S1312) is executed, and the present process is terminated.

  In the process of clearing the jackpot setting value, the start address of the jackpot end-time setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A) of the ROM 202 is set as the data transfer source (read source) address (S1311), and the jackpot is being hit. The data setting process for resetting the data set for the control of step S1312 is executed (S1312), and 0 is set to the address where the setting value in the jackpot in the various setting value storage areas 203e is set. A zero setting process for initialization is executed (S1313).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the data setting process (S1312) performed in the jackpot end process (see FIG. 26) will be described. The data setting process (S1312) is a process for resetting the data set for the control during the big hit.

  In this data setting process (S1312), first, the address data specified by the transfer source (read source) address is read, and the address indicated by the address data is set as the setting destination address (S1401). Here, the transfer source (reading source) address is set to the head address of the jackpot end time setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A) in the process of S1311 of the jackpot termination process (see FIG. 26). Further, as shown in FIG. 9A, since the head address of the jackpot end setting table 202g stores the address data indicating the game state setting area in the various set value storage areas 203e, the game state thereof. The address indicating the setting area is set as the setting destination address.

  Next, in the process of S1401, it is determined whether or not the data read from the jackpot end time setting table 202g is "00H" (S1402). If the result of the determination is "00H" (S1402: Yes), this process Ends and shifts to zero setting processing (see FIG. 28). On the other hand, when it is determined that the data read from the jackpot end time setting table 202g is data other than “00H” in the process of S1401 (S1402: No), 1 is added to the transfer source (read source) address, The added address is set as a new transfer source (read source) address (S1403).

  Next, the data of the setting value stored in the transfer source address is read and stored in the setting destination address (S1404). The setting destination address is the address of the various setting value storage area 202e set in the process of S1401. When the storage of the data is completed, 1 is added again to the transfer source address to set a new transfer source address (S1405), and the process returns to S1401. Then, in the process of S1402, the processes of S1401 to S1405 are repeated until 00H is read as the address data, and when 00H is read as the address data (S1402: Yes), based on the jackpot end time setting table 202g. Since the reset process has been completed, the process ends.

  Next, the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 after the end of the data setting process (S1312) will be described with reference to FIG. The zero setting process (see FIG. 28) is a process of initializing by overwriting various setting values set for performing a big hit control in the various setting value storage area 203e with 0.

  In the zero setting process (see FIG. 28), first, 1 is added to the transfer source (read source) address to set a new transfer source (read source) address (S1501). The address set as the transfer source (read source) address before the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) is the end address of the jackpot end time setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A). The jackpot end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B) used in this process is defined in the ROM 202 after the address next to the last address of the jackpot end setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A). ing. Therefore, in the zero setting process (see FIG. 28), 1 is added to the setting destination address at the beginning of the process to set the setting destination address from the end of the jackpot end time setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A) to the jackpot. It is moved to the beginning of the end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, following the end address of the jackpot end time setting table 202g referred to in the data setting processing (see FIG. 27), the jackpot used in this processing (zero setting processing). The end clear table 202h is defined. For this reason, by adopting a configuration in which this process (zero setting process) is executed after the data setting process (see FIG. 27), in this process, the transfer source address is determined again from the ROM 202 at the start of the process and set. The transfer source address can be specified by simply adding 1 to the immediately preceding transfer source address without the necessity of reworking. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

  Note that, for example, when all the data set at each address of the various set value storage area 203e is “00H” at the end of the big hit, the data setting process (see FIG. 27) is omitted and the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) is performed. (Refer to FIG. 3) only. In this case, it is necessary to determine the transfer source address of the data at the start of the zero setting process, set the address immediately before the transfer source address to the transfer source address, and then shift to the process of S1501. In the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the process of S1501, the process of adding 1 to the transfer source address and setting it as a new transfer source address is executed. This is because an address deviating from the set address by 1 is set as the transfer source address.

  Next, the address data stored in the address set as the transfer source (read source) address in the jackpot completion clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B) is read, and is indicated by the read address data. The address of the RAM 203 is set as the setting destination address (S1502).

  After the processing of S1502, in the processing of S1502, it is determined whether or not the data read from the transfer source (read source) address is "00H" (S1503), and it is determined that the read data is "00H". If so (S1503: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the read data is not "00H" (S1503: No), "00H" is overwritten on the address of the RAM 203 set as the setting destination address (S1504), and the process returns to S1501.

  After that, the processing of S1501 to S1504 is repeated until "00H" is read from the jackpot clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B). In the jackpot end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B), "00H" is stored only in the end address, and "00H" is not stored in the addresses other than the end address. The processing of S1501 to S1504 is repeated until "00H" is stored in all the addresses corresponding to the address data specified in.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a condition for ending the zero setting process (see FIG. 28), the number of times of setting “00H” as data in the various set value storage area 203e of the RAM 203 is described in the control program. , "00H" is read out as data from the jackpot end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B) without the configuration of terminating the processing when it is determined that the data setting for the set number of times is completed. It is configured to end the process when it is determined that it is.

  When the set number of times is described in the control program, the control program designer newly counts the number of set values each time the number of set values changes due to circumstances such as diversion of the program to another model. It is necessary to rewrite the control program according to the counted number. Therefore, in addition to the time and effort required to count the set values, if the designer makes a mistake, the control program will specify an incorrect number of repetitions, so the settings at the end of the jackpot will be completed normally. It may not be possible to cause the pachinko machine 10 to malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is only necessary to define "00H" as data at the end of the jackpot end-time clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B). It can reduce the possibility that the designer sometimes makes a mistake. Therefore, the data setting at the end of the jackpot can be executed more reliably based on the control program, so that the malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

  Note that the termination condition of the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) is when “00H” is read as data, because the lower byte of the address in the various set value storage area 203e (see FIG. 11) The address where "00H" is (that is, the address "F000H") is an area for storing the set value related to the ball launch, and the set value is not changed before and after the big hit (initialization is required at the end of the big hit). This is because the address is not). Since the address does not need to be initialized at the end of the jackpot, it is not necessary to define it as an address to be initialized in the jackpot end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B), and the jackpot end clear table 202h ( There is no possibility of appearing other than at the end of (see FIG. 9B). Therefore, it is possible to prevent "00H" from being read as data before the initialization of all the set values is completed, and the processing from ending.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 32. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

  First, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1601). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-on processing of S1716 (see FIG. 30) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous interruption”) in the current startup processing. It is determined whether or not it was started during the execution of () (S1602). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1713 of FIG. 30), the power-off process of S1716 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process of S1716 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1602: No), the current startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred, and the power-off in S1716 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1603).

  The confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1606. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not “55AAh”, it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1603: Yes), the process proceeds to S1604 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1603: No), the process proceeds to S1608.

  If the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to power shutdown). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1603: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1604. On the other hand, the startup process of this time is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process of S1716 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1603: No), and the process proceeds to S1608.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1602: Yes), the startup processing of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S1716, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, and therefore the process proceeds to S1604, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the processing of S1604, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1604). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, and it is confirmed whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1606). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read / write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1605: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1607), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You can

  In the process of S1608, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1608). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1716 is executed (see S1715 in FIG. 30). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1716 is executed, the process of S1608 with the power-off flag turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and the processing is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S1716 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1608: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1609), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1610), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1611), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1608 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current startup process is started after the power has been completely cut off, for example, and therefore the process of S1604 to S1606 is performed. This is the case where the processing has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) and started due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1608: No), S1609 which is a work area clearing process of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1610, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1610), and then the interrupt permission is set. Then (S1611), the process proceeds to the main process.

  It should be noted that the clear processing of S1609 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1604 when the processing of S1608 is reached through the processing of S1604 to S1606. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset by and the start-up process is started, the control of the voice lamp control unit 113 is continued by saving the data in the work area of the RAM 223 without clearing it. Because you can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or after the process of S1701 this time has been executed (S1701), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1701: No), the process proceeds to S1711 without performing the processes of S1702 to S1710. In the processing of S1701, it is the processing relating to the display (effect) that mainly determines whether 1 ms has elapsed in S1702 to S1710, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). , It is preferable to execute the command determination processing of S1711 and the variable display setting processing of S1712 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1711 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1712 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to make the setting related to the variation effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has passed in the process of S1701 (S1701: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1703 to S1712 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1702). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1708 described later (S1703), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1704). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not being turned on, the process goes to S1705 without notifying by the power-on notifying process.

  In the process of S1705, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the held quantity display updating process is executed (S1706). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen, and the setting is controlled as a command. Device 114. In the number-of-holds display updating process, a process of turning on a holding lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is performed.

  After that, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1707). In this frame button input monitoring / rendering process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the effect is monitored and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Further, when the frame effect 22 is pressed during the period in which the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the process of changing the stage is performed, and the back image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear surface image corresponding to the changed stage in the rear surface image change command, the display control device 114 causes the rear surface image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to be an image corresponding to the stage. The process of changing to. In addition, when the preliminary announcement character appears at the start of variable display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this change, or by pressing the frame button 22 during the reach effect, the expectation for the jackpot is displayed. It is also possible to change to a holding effect or to use the frame button 22 as an enter button for selecting one reach effect from a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1707 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S1708), and then the sound edit / output process is executed (S1709). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1709, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1710), and the process proceeds to S1711. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S1708 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound edit / output process of S1709 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1711, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1711). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1711). In the variable display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the variable display setting process (S1712) is completed, it is determined whether or not the power RAM occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1713). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1713 (S1713: Yes), the power-off flag and the power-off process in-progress flag are both turned on (S1715), and the power-off process is executed (S1716). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1717), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the information about the occurrence of power failure is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1713 (S1713: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1714), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1714: No), the process returns to S1701 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1714: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, and thus can call the clerk of the hall or the like to request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, the command determination processing (S1711) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1711). The command determination process (S1711) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 30) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the command received from the main control device 110 is determined. .. In addition, in this process, when the number-of-holding-balls command is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

  In the command determination process, first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not (S1801). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1801: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1802), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S1803). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 32) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1801: No), then it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1804). When the stop type command is received (S1804: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1805), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1806), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 32) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1804: No), then it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1807). When the number of reserved balls command is received (S1807: Yes), the value included in the received number of reserved balls command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (special symbol The variable display hold count N) is extracted and stored in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1808). In the process of S1808, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is set. After the processing of S1808 ends, the processing returns to the main processing.

  Here, since the number of reserved balls command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize) or when the special symbol lottery is performed, the start prize. Each time is detected, or each time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed by the process of S1808 to the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, at the time of detection of the start winning or special At the time of lottery of symbols, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1808 is executed, the display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1807, if the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S1807: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1809). Then, when the winning information command is received (S1809: Yes), various information (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) is extracted from the received winning information command as winning information (S1809). After the processing of S1809 ends, next, the winning information (winning / non-hit, stop type, variation pattern) extracted in the processing of S1809 is the first in the empty areas (first area to fourth area) of the winning information storage area 223a. Store in area (S1810),
Return to main processing.

  In the process of S1809, when the winning information command is not received (S1809: No), it is then determined whether or not the round number command is received from the main control device 110 (S1812). When the round number command is received (S1812: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1813), and the display round number command is set according to the extracted round number ( (S1814), the present process ends. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1702) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1812, when the round number command is not received (S1812: No), it is determined whether or not another command is received, and the process according to the received command is executed ( S1819), and returns to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed controlled. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1712). This variable display setting process (S1712) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1901). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1901: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and thus the processing of S1906 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S1901: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S1902), and then, in the processing of S1803 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 31), the variation pattern The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1903).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1904). In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1905). In the process of S1905, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1906.

  In the process of S1906, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1906). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1906: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110. The setting process ends and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1906: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1907), and then in the process of S1806 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1908).

  Next, the stop type designated by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1909), and the display control device is set based on the set stop type. A display stop type command for notifying 114 is generated, the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1910), and this processing ends. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display of the variable effect is controlled.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 determines that the "special symbol big hit", the variation effect corresponding to the "special symbol big hit", and after the end of the variation effect The set value of the jackpot state (special game state) is set in each set value storage area 203e of the RAM 203, and the offset value for selecting the state after the jackpot is finished from the state setting table 202f is stored in the RAM 203. It is configured. At the end timing of the jackpot, based on the offset value stored in the RAM 203 in advance, the set value corresponding to the state after the jackpot is read from the state setting table 202f and set in the various set value storage area 203e. Is configured to.

  The gaming state after the jackpot is determined based on a random number value that is acquired in association with a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), but in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game state is acquired. Hold the random number value obtained until the jackpot end timing, and do not use it to identify the gaming state after the jackpot, convert the obtained random number value into an offset value and hold it, It is configured to set the game state after the jackpot is over based on the offset value.

  Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally obtain a random number value that is a jackpot for a special symbol from outside, analyze the timing when the random number value that is a jackpot appears, and assign the jackpot based on the analyzed timing. Can be suppressed. Specifically, the analyzed timing is set on a so-called hanging board, a random number is acquired at the timing when a random number value that is a big hit appears, and the fraudulent act of controlling to determine whether the big hit is hit is suppressed. You can

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various setting values to be set in the various setting value storage area 203e as the game state after the jackpot is over (the special symbol lottery state, the ordinary symbol state, the number of hours saved, the variation pattern selection table). The number of times of switching) is not specified and held in advance before the jackpot game is started, but only the offset value, which is a value indicating the storage position of various setting values in the state setting table 202f, is held. Therefore, it suffices to provide only a storage area for the offset value storage area of 1 byte in the RAM 203. Therefore, the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a zero setting process (see FIG. 28) that is a process of initializing the setting value for the big hit at the end timing of the big hit is executed. In this zero setting process (see FIG. 28), “00H” is sequentially set as data to a plurality of addresses defined in the jackpot end-time clear table 202h of the ROM 202. That is, in the jackpot end clear table 202h, only the setting destination address for initializing the setting is defined, and the control of writing "00H" is described on the control program side.

  When the jackpot end clear table 202h is configured to prescribe the setting destination address of each setting value storage area 203e and the setting data (that is, 00H) for setting the setting destination address, the jackpot end clearing table There is a problem that the data amount of 202h increases. On the other hand, like the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if only the setting destination address is defined in the big hit end clear table 202h, the data amount of the big hit end clear table 202h can be reduced. The capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a condition for ending the zero setting process (see FIG. 28), the number of times of setting data in the various set value storage areas 203e is described in the control program, and the number of times of setting is set. The processing is not terminated when it is determined that the data setting has been completed, but the processing is terminated when it is determined that "00H" is read out as data from the jackpot end clear table 202h. is doing.

  When the set number of times is described in the control program, the control program designer newly counts the number of set values each time the number of set values changes due to circumstances such as diversion of the program to another model. It is necessary to rewrite the control program according to the counted number. Therefore, in addition to the time and effort required to count the set values, if the designer makes a mistake, the control program will specify an incorrect number of repetitions, so the settings at the end of the jackpot will be completed normally. It may not be possible to cause the pachinko machine 10 to malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is only necessary to define "00H" as data at the end of the jackpot end time setting table 202g and the jackpot end clear table 202h, and therefore, when designing the control program. The possibility that the designer makes a mistake can be reduced. Therefore, the data setting at the end of the jackpot can be executed more reliably based on the control program, so that the malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot end setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A) and the jackpot end clear table 202h in the data setting process (see FIG. 27) and the zero setting process (see FIG. 28). Although each processing is terminated when "00H" is read as data from (see FIG. 9B), the termination condition of each processing is not limited to this. For example, when "FFH" is read as data from the jackpot end setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A) or the jackpot end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B), each process is terminated. May be.

  Further, the ending conditions of the data setting process (see FIG. 27) and the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) may be different. For example, when "00H" is read as data from the jackpot end setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A), the data setting process (see FIG. 27) is ended, and the jackpot end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9). The zero setting process (see FIG. 28) may be configured to be terminated when “FFH” is read as data from (see (b)).

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with a process of continuing the control stipulated in the ROM 202 until "00H" is read only in the jackpot end process (FIG. 26). It is not limited. For example, the same process may be performed when setting at the start of fluctuation or setting at the end of fluctuation.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 16), in addition to the setting of the fluctuation pattern, the jackpot setting, the offset value, and the like are read from the game result setting table 202e. Although the process of transferring to the various set value storage area 203e is performed, the process is not limited to this. For example, in the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 16), only the variation pattern may be set, and the setting value and the offset value indicating the setting during jackpot may be set at the start of the jackpot.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 33. In the above-described first embodiment, two processes of a data setting process (see FIG. 27) and a zero setting process (see FIG. 28) are provided as a process for resetting the jackpot setting, and various processes are performed in each process. The set value of a predetermined address in the set value storage area 203e is reset.

  More specifically, the jackpot end time setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A) defined in the ROM 202 is processed by the data setting process (see FIG. 27) performed in the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 26). Based on this, the setting of the game state is reset, and by the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) executed subsequently to the data setting process (see FIG. 27), the jackpot end clear table 202h (defined in the ROM 202 is set. Based on FIG. 9B), the setting value of the address in the RAM 203 to which the setting of the big hit is set is cleared.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, a jackpot end setting / clear table 202i including information defined in the jackpot end setting table 202g and information defined in the jackpot end setting clear table 202h is provided. , The setting during jackpot is reset by the data setting process (see FIG. 27) based on the information defined in the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in structure is that the jackpot end setting table 202g provided in the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, and The jackpot end setting / clear table 202i is provided instead of the jackpot end clear table 202h. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33A is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. Similar to the first embodiment, the ROM 202 of the present embodiment has a first random number table 202a, a first hit type selection table 202b, a second hit random number table 202c, a variation pattern selection table 202d, and a game result setting. A table 202e and a state setting table 202f are provided. In addition to these, the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is provided with a jackpot end time setting / clear table 202i. That is, the ROM 202 of the present embodiment is provided with a jackpot end setting / clear table 202i in place of the jackpot end setting table 202g and the jackpot end clear table 202h provided in the first embodiment. .. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  The jackpot end setting / clear table 202i is a table that is referred to for resetting the setting value of the address to which the setting in the jackpot of the various setting value storage areas 203e is set at the jackpot ending timing. It is defined in the range of addresses "1202H" to "121EH". Details of the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 33B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the data defined in the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i. As shown in FIG. 33B, this jackpot end-time setting / clearing table 202i includes address data indicating an address (setting destination) whose setting value needs to be reset in various setting value storage areas 203e, The setting contents to be set at that address (setting destination) are defined alternately. As the address that needs to be reset, for example, an address (F030H) storing the setting of the maximum number of rounds, an address (F031H) of a winning number counter, etc. are defined.

  As described above, in the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i, the data defined in the jackpot end setting table 202g in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment and the data defined in the jackpot end clear table 202h. Both are specified. Here, only the information indicating the setting destination address is defined in the jackpot end clear table 202h, and the data “00H” to be stored in the setting destination address is not defined in the table and is set in the control program side. The control process for setting "00H" is described. On the other hand, in the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i, the setting values to be set in all the setting destination addresses are defined in the table. That is, all the data has the same data structure as the jackpot end time setting table 202g in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, two types of tables having different data configurations (a jackpot end setting table 202g in which both address data of a setting destination and data to be set in the setting destination are defined, and a setting) Since the setting change of the various set value storage areas 203e is performed by referring to the jackpot end clear table 202h) in which only the above address data is defined, the data setting process (see FIG. 27) and the zero setting are performed, respectively. It was necessary to provide two types of control processing called processing (see FIG. 28) and perform the processing separately. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, only one type of the jackpot end time setting / clear table 202i is provided, and the data arrangement is the same as that of the jackpot end time setting table 202g. Therefore, if only one type of data setting process (see FIG. 27) is prepared as the control process, all settings relating to the jackpot can be reset at the end of the jackpot.

<Regarding control processing in the second embodiment>
Hereinafter, it will be described with reference to FIG. 27 again that in the second embodiment, if only the data setting process (see FIG. 27) is provided, all the settings relating to the jackpot can be reset. As described above, FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the data setting process which is a process for resetting the setting value regarding the jackpot.

  In the data setting process (see FIG. 27), first, the address data defined in the transfer source address is read, and the address indicated by the read address data is set as the setting destination address (S1401). Here, in the first embodiment, the transfer source (read source) address is set to the head address of the jackpot end time setting table 202g before the data setting process is started (S1311 in FIG. 26). In the second embodiment, instead of this, the start address (1202H) of the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i (see FIG. 33B) is set as the transfer source (read source) address. Therefore, in the processing of S1401 performed after the start of the data setting processing (see FIG. 27), the address of the game state setting area defined in the start address of the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i (see FIG. 33 (b)) (F035H) is set as the setting destination address.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the data read as the setting destination address is "00H" (S1402), and if it is determined that the data is "00H" (S1402: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the read data is not "00H" (S1402: No), 1 is added to the transfer source (read source) address and the new transfer source (read source) address is set (S1403). ).

  In the processing of S1402 that is first performed after the start of the data setting processing (see FIG. 27), the address (F035H) of the game state setting area is read as the setting destination address, so the read data is not "00H". It is determined (S1402: No), and the address (1203H) obtained by adding 1 to the start address (1202H) of the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i (see FIG. 33B) is set as the transfer source address (S1403). ..

  After that, the setting value data stored in the transfer source address is set to the setting destination address (S1404), 1 is added to the transfer source address to set a new transfer source address (S1405), and the process returns to S1401. In the process of S1404 which is first performed after the start of the data setting process (see FIG. 27), the address “1203H” is set as the transfer source address, so the reset data stored in the transfer source address is read out. Set to the address (F035H) of the game state setting area (S1404), add 1 to the transfer source address "1203H" to set the transfer source address to "1204H" (S1405), and then to the processing of S1401. Return.

  After that, the setting destination address defined in the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i (see FIG. 33 (b)) is set to the setting destination defined in the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i (see FIG. 33 (b)). The process of writing the contents is repeated. The setting destination address defined in the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i (see FIG. 33B) sets the test signal setting address “F01DH”, “F01EH”, or the maximum number of rounds. Since an address other than “00H” such as “F030H” which is the address for this purpose is defined, it is determined that “00H” has been read by the processing of S1402 before resetting all the setting destinations, and the data is It is possible to prevent the setting process (see FIG. 27) from being terminated. After setting all the data, the transfer destination (read source) address is set to "00H" defined at the end of the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i (see FIG. 33B), The data setting process (see FIG. 27) is ended by the process of S1402.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as the condition for ending the data setting process (see FIG. 27), the number of times of setting data in the various set value storage areas 203e is described in the control program and set. If it is determined that "00H" has been read out as data from the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i, the processing is terminated without configuring to end the processing when it is determined that the data setting for the number of times has been completed. It is configured to let.

  When the set number of times is described in the control program, the control program designer newly counts the number of set values each time the number of set values changes due to circumstances such as diversion of the program to another model. It is necessary to rewrite the control program according to the counted number. Therefore, in addition to the time and effort required to count the set values, if the designer makes a mistake, the control program will specify an incorrect number of repetitions, so the settings at the end of the jackpot will be completed normally. It may not be possible to cause the pachinko machine 10 to malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is only necessary to define "00H" as data at the end of the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i jackpot end setting / clear table 202i. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the designer will make a mistake when designing. Therefore, the data setting at the end of the jackpot can be executed more reliably based on the control program, so that the malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, only one type of the jackpot end time setting / clear table 202i is provided, and the jackpot setting is reset by referring to the single table. Therefore, if only one type of data setting process (see FIG. 27) is prepared as the control process, all the settings relating to the jackpot can be reset at the end of the jackpot, so that the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment can be reset. It is possible to reduce the program capacity as compared with.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the data setting process (see FIG. 27), when “00H” is read out as data from the jackpot end time setting / clear table 202i (see FIG. 33 (b)), each of them will be described. Although the processing is configured to end, the termination condition of the data setting processing (see FIG. 27) is not limited to this. For example, the processing may be ended when “FFH” is read as data from the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i (see FIG. 33B).

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. In the first embodiment described above, in the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) for initializing the set value for performing the jackpot control, the jackpot end clear table (see FIG. 9B) is defined. The configuration is such that "00H" is set to all the set destination addresses. Therefore, if there is a set value having an initial value other than “00H”, it cannot be specified in the jackpot end-time clear table (see FIG. 9B), and another process is provided to initialize it. The values had to be set separately.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, a plurality of setting values having different initial values can be initialized by one process at the end of the jackpot. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, among the set values that have been initialized based on the jackpot end-time clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B), the initial set value for the test signal is set. The value is "FFH". On the other hand, the set value of the maximum number of rounds and the initial value of the winning number counter and the like are configured to be “00H” like the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in configuration is that the jackpot end clear table 202h provided in the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is replaced. That is, the jackpot end initial value setting table 202j is provided. Further, some processing included in the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 differs from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp controller 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34A is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. Similar to the first embodiment, the ROM 202 of the present embodiment has a first random number table 202a, a first hit type selection table 202b, a second hit random number table 202c, a variation pattern selection table 202d, and a game result setting. A table 202e, a state setting table 202f, and a jackpot end time setting table 202g are provided. In addition to these, the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is provided with a jackpot end-time initial value setting table 202j. That is, the ROM 202 of this embodiment is provided with a jackpot end initial value setting table 202j in place of the jackpot end time clear table 202h provided in the first embodiment. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the jackpot end initial value setting table 202j will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot end initial value setting table 202j is a table stored in the range of addresses "1205H" to "1212H" of the ROM 202, and each address defines the addresses of various setting value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 11). Has been done. In the jackpot end initial value setting table 202j, "00H" is stored as data at addresses "1207H" and "1213H" of the ROM 202. The "00H" data is not data for designating an address, but data used for ending the repeating process for setting an initial value.

  Although details will be described later, in the zero setting process 2 (see FIG. 36), which is one process of the jackpot ending process, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 causes the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to sort the addresses of the ROM 202 from the jackpot ending initial value setting table 202j. The stored data is read, and either "00H" or "FFH" (initial value data) is set as a set value at the address indicated by the read stored data (address data).

  Whether "00H" or "FFH" is set as the initial value is determined by the data arrangement order. Specifically, "FFH" is set as an initial value to the address of the various set value storage area 203e indicated by the data stored at the address before the address "1207H" where "00H" is defined as the data. Set. On the other hand, "00H" is set as an initial value to the address of the various set value storage area 203e indicated by the data stored at the address after the address "1207H" where "00H" is defined as the data.

<Regarding Control Processing in Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 35 and FIG. 36, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. In the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 35), similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a set value for determining the state after the jackpot is set is set in the various set value storage area 203e, and the jackpot control is performed. This is a process that is executed to reset the set value that was set to be performed.

  Of the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 35), in each process of S1301 to S1312, the same process as each of S1301 to S1312 of the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment is executed. Then, in the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 35) in the third embodiment, when the process of S1312 is completed, instead of the zero setting process (S1313) of the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment, zero setting is performed. The process 2 (S1321) is executed. The zero setting process 2 (S1321) is a process for resetting the set values set in the various set value storage areas 203e for performing the jackpot control to the initial values.

  Here, the details of the zero setting process 2 (S1321) will be described with reference to FIG. Of the zero setting process 2 (S1321), in each process of S1501 to S1503, the same process as each of S1501 to S1503 of the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment is executed. The description is omitted.

  When it is determined in the process of S1502 that the address data read from the transfer source (read source) address is not "00H" (S1503: No), various setting value storage areas designated as the setting destination address in the process of S1502. "FFH" is set as the initial value in the address of 203e (S1511), and the process returns to S1501. On the other hand, when it is determined that the address data read in the process of S1502 is “00H” (S1503: Yes), the process proceeds to S1512. That is, the processes of S1501 to S1503 and S1511 are repeated until “00H” is read as data from the jackpot end initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34B).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the initial value of the set value of the test signal is “FFH”. On the other hand, the initial value of the setting values other than the setting value of the test signal (the setting value of the maximum round number, the value of the winning number counter, etc.) is "00H". In order to collectively set these different initial values, the addresses for setting the test signals are defined in order from the head address of the jackpot end initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34B). Then, until the big hit end initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34 (b)) is read as "00H" as data, it is read from the big hit end initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34 (b)). The processing for setting "FFH" as an initial value in the data setting position (address) is looped, and when "00H" is read, the loop is terminated and the process proceeds to S1512.

  Next, in the process of S1512, 1 is added to the address of the jackpot end initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34B) set as the transfer source (read source) (S1512), and the address after the addition is added. The address data stored in the RAM 203 is read and set as a setting destination address for setting an initial value (S1513).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the address data read in the process of S1513 is "00H" (S1514), and if it is determined that the read data is "00H", this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the read data is not "00H" (S1514: No), "00H" is set to the address set as the setting destination (S1515), and the process returns to S1512. That is, unless "00H" is read as data from the jackpot end initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34 (b)), it is defined in the jackpot end initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34 (b)). "00H" is sequentially set to the existing addresses as an initial value. When "00H" is read as data from the jackpot end initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34 (b)), it means that the initial values have been set to all the setting destinations. The process ends.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as the setting items to be initialized at the end of the jackpot, in addition to the setting value having the initial value of “00H”, the setting value having the initial value of “FFH” is set. Also, it is configured so that initialization can be performed by a single process. Therefore, the degree of freedom in setting the initial value of each set value can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, the set value of the initial value "00H" and the set value of the initial value "FFH" are provided, but the initial value of each setting item is not limited to these values. , “0FH” may be set as the initial value, or “01H” may be set as the initial value.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the zero setting process 2 (see FIG. 36), when “00H” is read as data from the jackpot end initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34 (b)), It is configured so that the loop process of sequentially setting "FFH" as an initial value to each setting destination address defined in the jackpot end initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34B) is executed. The condition for exiting the process is not limited to this. The data that can be used as a condition for exiting the loop process may be any data that corresponds to the lower byte of the address where the setting is not likely to change when the game state is changed. For example, the addresses “F09CH” to “F0FFH” in the various set value storage areas 203e are unused work areas as described above. Therefore, since the set value is not rewritten due to the change of the game state or the like, the lower byte (for example, "AAH" or "BBH") of any of these addresses may be used as the end condition.

  Similarly, the data setting process (see FIG. 27) in the first and second embodiments, the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, and the zero setting process 2 in the third embodiment. The condition for ending (see FIG. 36) is not limited to the case where "00H" is read as the data, and the process may be ended when "AAH" or "BBH" is read, for example. You may comprise.

  Further, the initial values set in the zero setting process 2 (see FIG. 36) in the third embodiment are not limited to two types, and an arbitrary number of initial values may be provided.

  Further, the data setting processing (see FIG. 27) in the first and second embodiments, the zero setting processing (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, and the zero setting processing 2 (see FIG. 36) in the third embodiment. (See reference) is executed to initialize the jackpot setting when the jackpot is finished, but is not limited to this. For example, the time saving number of the normal symbol becomes 0, and when shifting to the normal state of the normal symbol, any of these processes may be used to erase the setting of the time saving state of the normal symbol.

  Further, the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, the data setting process (see FIG. 27) and the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) in the second embodiment, and the zero setting process in the third embodiment. In No. 2 (see FIG. 36), reading of data 1 and setting of data 1 are alternately performed. On the other hand, a plurality of data may be collectively read and the collectively read data may be collectively set.

  For example, in the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) of the first embodiment, the address data stored in the transfer source address is read and set as the setting destination address (see S1502 in FIG. 28), and the read address data is If the data is other than "00H" (S1503: No), the process may return to S1501 without shifting to the process of S1504.

  Specifically, every time a transfer source address is newly set by the processing of S1501, the address data stored in the transfer source address is stored in different general-purpose registers (general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2). Therefore, it is set to the setting destination address. For example, first, the data stored in the address set as the transfer source address by the process of S1501 is stored in the general-purpose register 210b1 and stored in the address newly set as the transfer source address by the process of S1501 performed next. The stored data may be stored in the general-purpose register 210b2, for example. Then, thereafter, each time the transfer source address is updated by the processing of S1501, the transfer source address may be sequentially stored in the general-purpose register 210c1, the general-purpose register 210c2, or the like.

  If it is determined that the read address data is "00H" in the process of S1503, "00H" is overwritten as data on all the addresses set as the setting destination addresses, and then the process ends. It may be configured as follows.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, six types of general-purpose registers 210b1, 210b2, 210c1, 210c2, 210d1, 210d2 are provided as general-purpose registers for temporarily storing data. Although only 6 types can be set at the maximum, the number of general-purpose registers may be increased to configure more setting destination addresses.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first to third embodiments, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 performs the setting of the variation pattern when the jackpot is won, the setting during the jackpot, and the setting when the jackpot is finished. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be performed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first to third embodiments, the game result setting table 202e, the state setting table 202f, etc. are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be provided in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first to third embodiments, the various set value storage areas 203e are provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113.

  Further, the present invention may be carried out on a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, a pachinko machine that raises the expectation value for a jackpot once it hits the jackpot several times (for example, twice or three times) including that (commonly known as a two-time title, a three-time title, and May be implemented as). Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine for generating a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area after the jackpot pattern is displayed. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for confirming and displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a ball launching handle is not provided. There are things. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, or due to, for example, the operation of the stop switch or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stopping is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as a burden on equipment and a restriction on a place where a game machine is installed due to separate handling of a medal and a ball.

  Below, in addition to the game machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be shown.

<Feature A group> (The process ends when 00H is read)
According to a predetermined control procedure, control means for executing game control, storage means for storing control data read by the control means, and specific data for which the control data read by the control means is predetermined Read control which is a process of repeatedly reading the control data and performing control based on the read control data according to the control procedure. When the processing is executed, the read control processing is ended based on the read control data being determined by the control data determining means to be the specific data, and the read control data is executed in accordance with the control procedure. A gaming machine A1 characterized by shifting to the processing of.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the control of the game is executed by the control means according to a predetermined control procedure, the control data read by the control means based on the control procedure is stored in the storage means, and the read control data is stored. The control data determination means determines whether the data is predetermined specific data. When the control unit executes the read control process of repeatedly reading the control data and the control based on the read control data, it is determined that the read control data is the predetermined specific data. Based on the determination made by the means, the read control process is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process executed according to the control procedure.

  As a result, in the read control process, if the specific data is read, the process shifts to the next process, so it is not necessary to specify how many times the control data read and the control based on the read control data are repeated. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the control from being performed a number of times different from the number of repetitions to be performed by the read control process due to a mistake in defining the number of repetitions. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game machine from malfunctioning.

  In the gaming machine A1, the control data is defined such that setting destination data indicating a setting destination for performing a game-related setting and setting data for setting the setting destination indicated by the setting destination data are alternately set. In the read control process, the data is read in the order specified by the control data, and the setting data to be read next is set in the setting destination indicated by the read setting destination data. A gaming machine A2 characterized by the above.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are produced. That is, the setting data indicating the setting destination for setting the game and the setting data for setting the setting destination indicated by the setting destination data are alternately defined in the control data. The data is read by the read control process in the order specified by the control data, and the setting data to be read next is set to the setting destination indicated by the read setting destination data.

  As a result, when reading data, it is not necessary to perform a process of determining which data out of the data specified in the control data should be read next, so that the processing load of the control means can be reduced. There is an effect that can be.

  The gaming machine A2 is provided with a state change determining means for determining whether or not to change the gaming state, and the control data is defined by various setting values relating to the gaming state as the setting data. A game machine A3, which executes the read control process when it is determined by the state change determination means that the game state is changed.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced. That is, whether or not to change the game state is determined by the state change determining means. Various setting values relating to the gaming state are defined in the control data as setting data. When it is determined by the state change determination means that the game state is changed, the read control processing is executed by the control means.

  As a result, when the gaming state is changed, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning without setting the setting value to be set.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A3, the specific data is data different from any other data defined in the control data.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A3. That is, since the specific data is different from any other data defined in the control data, the same data as the specific data is not read before the specific data is read from the control data.

  Therefore, since the read control process is repeated until the specific data is read, it is possible to prevent the read control process from being terminated before all the controls that should be performed by the read control process are executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game machine from malfunctioning because the control to be executed is not executed.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A4, the specific data is defined at the end of the control data, and the gaming machine A5 is provided.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machines A1 to A4, the specific data is defined at the end of the control data, so that control based on all other data defined in the control data is ensured. It has the effect that it can be executed.

<Characteristic B group> (0 is sequentially set to the addresses stored in the table until 00H is read)
According to a predetermined control procedure, a control means for controlling the game, and a storage means for storing a plurality of setting destination data indicating the setting destination for the setting of the game, the control means, according to the control procedure The reading process of sequentially reading the setting destination data from the storage unit and the setting process of setting a predetermined set value to the setting destination indicated by the setting destination data read by the reading process are repeatedly performed. A gaming machine B1 characterized in that.

  According to the gaming machine B1, according to a predetermined control procedure, the storage means stores a plurality of setting destination data indicating a setting destination where the control means for controlling the game performs setting regarding the game. The control means performs a reading process for sequentially reading the setting destination data from the storage means in accordance with a control procedure, and a setting process for setting a predetermined set value to the setting destination indicated by the setting destination data read by the reading process. It is repeated.

  Thus, the predetermined setting value can be set by the setting process without storing the setting value for setting the setting destination data read by the reading process in the gaming machine. Therefore, there is an effect that the amount of data stored in the predetermined set value can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B1, the control means performs the setting process based on the read one setting destination data every time the one setting destination data is read by the reading process. A gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, every time the setting destination data of 1 is read by the reading processing, the setting process is performed by the control means based on the read 1 setting destination data. Therefore, the amount of data read by the reading process and set by the setting process can be minimized.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the setting destination data is stipulated in an order of being read by the control means, and the gaming machine B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are produced. That is, since the setting destination data is defined in the order in which it is read by the control means, a process of determining which data among the data stored in the storage means should be read next each time the reading processing is performed. There is no need to do. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load of the control means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machines B1 to B3, the control means reads out by the determining means and the determining means that determines whether the setting destination data read out by the reading processing is predetermined specific data. And the avoidance means for avoiding the process of setting a predetermined setting value to the setting destination indicated by the read setting destination data when it is determined that the setting destination data is predetermined specific data. Characteristic game machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are produced. That is, the determination means determines whether or not the setting destination data read by the reading process is the specific data set in advance. When the determination means determines that the read setting destination data is predetermined specific data, the processing of setting a predetermined set value to the setting destination indicated by the read setting destination data is avoided. Avoided by means.

  Thus, even if the control program does not specify the number of times the read process and the set process are repeated, the read process and the set process can be repeated until the specific data is read. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the read control process from being terminated before all the controls that should be performed by the read control process due to a mistake in defining the number of repetitions. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game machine from malfunctioning because the control to be executed is not executed.

  In the gaming machine B4, the specific data is data different from any of the other setting destination data stored in the storage means.

  According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of the game machine B4, the following effect is achieved. That is, since the specific data is different from any of the other setting destination data stored in the storage means, the same data as the specific data is not read before the specific data is read from the storage means.

  As a result, the read process and the setting process are repeated until the specific data is read, so that it is possible to prevent the process from being terminated before all the controls that should be performed by the control means are executed. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game machine from malfunctioning because the control to be executed is not executed.

  In the gaming machine B4 or B5, the specific data is defined at the end of the setting destination data, the gaming machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B4 or B5, the specific data is defined at the end of the setting destination data, so control based on all other setting destination data stored in the storage means. There is an effect that can be surely executed.

  In the gaming machine B4, the predetermined set value is provided with a first set value and a second set value different from the first set value, and the control means causes the determination means to perform the control procedure. Until the setting destination data read according to the above is first determined to be predetermined specific data, the setting destination data is read and the first setting value is set to the setting destination indicated by the read setting destination data. After the first determination by the determination means that the setting destination data read according to the control procedure is the predetermined specific data, the setting destination data is read and the reading is performed. A gaming machine B7, characterized in that the processing for setting the second setting value to the setting destination indicated by the setting destination data is repeated.

  According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect of the game machine B4, the following effect is achieved. That is, the first set value and the second set value different from the first set value are provided as the predetermined set values. Until the determination unit first determines that the setting destination data read according to the control unit is predetermined specific data, the setting destination data is read and the setting destination indicated by the read setting destination data is first set. The process of setting the value is repeated by the control means. After the setting destination data read according to the control procedure is first determined to be the predetermined specific data, the setting destination data is read and the second setting value is set to the setting destination indicated by the read setting destination data. The processing to be performed is repeated by the control means.

  As a result, it is not necessary to store the first set value and the second set value in association with the setting destination, so that it is possible to reduce the amount of data stored in the storage unit.

<Characteristic C group> (The offset value is calculated from the big hit random number, and the offset value is held during the big hit)
In a gaming machine provided with a storage unit that stores information about a game and a control unit that controls a game, a game state determining unit that determines a game state and a game state determined by the game state determining unit are set to a predetermined value. A game state setting means for setting based on the establishment of a condition is provided, and the storage means stores setting data for setting a game state by the game state setting means and data necessary for selecting the setting data. A certain identification data is stored, and selection means for selecting the identification data corresponding to the game state determined by the game state determination means from the storage means, and the identification data selected by the selection means. Holding means for holding until at least the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the game state setting means is held by the holding means Gaming machine C1, characterized in that the setting data corresponding to the identification data are, and sets read from said storage means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the game state is determined by the game state determining means, and the setting data for setting the game state by the game state setting means and the identification data necessary for selecting the setting data are stored. Stored by means. The identification data corresponding to the game state determined by the game state determination means is selected from the storage means by the selection means, and the identification data selected by the selection means is held by the holding means until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The setting data corresponding to the identification data held by the holding means is read from the storage means and set by the game state setting means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

  As a result, the identification data corresponding to the gaming state determined by the gaming state determining means is held by the holding means, so that it is possible to prevent the method of determining the gaming state by the gaming state determining means from being obtained from the outside. .. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that are externally controlled by the game state determination means so as to determine a game state that is advantageous to the player.

  In the gaming machine C1, the size of the identification data is smaller than that of the setting data, the gaming machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the size of the identification data is smaller than that of the setting data. Therefore, the amount of data stored in the holding means is smaller than that in the case where the holding means holds the setting data. The effect is that it can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the storage means stores a plurality of state data for setting a game state from when the game state is determined by the game state determining means until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The identification data is stored in the storage means in association with each of the plurality of state data, and one state data is selected from the plurality of state data and set. A gaming machine C3, further comprising means, wherein the selecting means selects the identification data corresponding to the one state data selected by the state selecting means.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are produced. That is, the storage means stores a plurality of state data for setting the game state from when the game state is determined by the game state determining means to when the predetermined condition is satisfied. The identification data is stored in the storage means in association with each of the plurality of state data. One state data is selected from the plurality of state data and set by the state selecting means.

  Thus, when the identification data is selected by the selection means, it is only necessary to select the identification data stored in association with the one state data selected and set by the state selection means. There is an effect that the processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where the data and the data are selected independently.

  In the gaming machine C1, when the game state is determined by the game state determining means, state setting means for setting a game state different from the determined game state until the predetermined condition is satisfied is provided. A gaming machine C4 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, when the gaming state is determined by the gaming state determining means, a gaming state different from the determined gaming state is given a predetermined condition by the state setting means. Since it is set until the above condition is satisfied, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game until the predetermined condition is satisfied can be improved.

  In the gaming machines C1 to C3, an acquisition unit that acquires random information based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state that is advantageous to the player based on the random information. And a gaming state based on the random information obtained by the obtaining means when the gaming state determining means determines to shift to the special gaming state by the lottery means. The gaming state setting means sets the gaming state determined by the gaming state determining means on the basis of the end of the special gaming state, the gaming machine C4. ..

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are produced. That is, random information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the random information is determined by the lottery means. To be judged. When the lottery means determines to shift to the special game state, the game state determination means determines the game state based on the random information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the end of the special gaming state, the gaming state setting means sets the gaming state determined by the gaming state determining means.

  As a result, since it is not necessary to retain the random information acquired by the acquisition means until the special gaming state ends, the information corresponding to the special gaming state among the random information is obtained from the outside by fraudulent acts. Can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of inputting information corresponding to the special game state from the outside and shifting to the special game state.

<Characteristic D group> (Data is read collectively and then data is set collectively)
According to a predetermined control procedure, a control means for controlling a game, a storage means for storing a plurality of setting destination data indicating a setting destination for performing the setting relating to the game, and a setting destination data stored in the storage means. A data storage area for storing the data, and a determination means for determining whether or not the setting destination data read by the control means is predetermined specific data, and the control means, in accordance with the control procedure, A read storage process for reading the setting destination data from the storage unit and storing the read setting destination data in the data storage area is repeated for a plurality of setting destination data, and the data storage area is obtained by the reading storage process. The batch setting process of collectively setting a predetermined set value to each of the setting destinations indicated by the plurality of setting destination data stored in In the reading and storing process, the batch setting process is performed based on the fact that the read setting destination data is the predetermined specific data determined by the determining means. Gaming machine D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, according to a predetermined control procedure, a plurality of setting destination data indicating a setting destination to which the control means for controlling the game makes settings regarding the game are stored by the storage means, and stored in the storage means. The setting destination data is stored in the data storage area. The determining means determines whether or not the setting destination data read by the control means is predetermined specific data. According to a control procedure, a read storage process of reading the setting destination data from the storage unit and storing the read setting destination data in the data storage area is repeated for a plurality of setting destination data, and data storage by the reading storage process. The control unit executes a collective setting process for collectively setting a predetermined set value to each setting destination indicated by the plurality of setting destination data stored in the area. In the reading and storing process, when the read out setting destination data is the specific data determined in advance by the determining means, the batch setting process is performed.

  As a result, if specific data is read in the read storage process, the process proceeds to the batch setting process. Therefore, in the read storage process, it is specified how many times the setting destination data is read and stored in the data storage area. There is no need. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the control from being performed a number of times different from the number of times of repetition to be performed by the read and storage processing due to a mistake in defining the number of times of repetition. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game machine from malfunctioning.

  In the gaming machine D1, the specific data is data different from any of the other setting destination data stored in the storage means, and the gaming machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the specific data is different from any other data defined in the control data, the same data as the specific data is not read before the specific data is read from the control data.

  As a result, the read storage process is repeated until the specific data is read, so that it is possible to prevent the read storage process from ending before all the controls that should be performed by the read storage process are executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game machine from malfunctioning because the control to be executed is not executed.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the specific data is stored at the end of the setting destination data, the gaming machine D3.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the specific data is defined at the end of the setting destination data, so control based on all other setting destination data stored in the storage means. There is an effect that can be surely executed.

  The gaming machine Z1 wherein each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball becomes a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through a winning opening), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow a ball to be won, and a value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

  The gaming machine Z2, wherein each gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

  A gaming machine Z3, wherein each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is provided. The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special game state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
110 Main controller (control means)
202 ROM (storage means)
202h Big hit end clear table (storage means)
202j Big hit end initial value setting table (storage means)
S1502, S1513 Read processing S1504, S1511, S1515 setting processing

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, change the state by setting a set value to a plurality of setting destinations that make settings relating to the game state when the game state is changed. In such a gaming machine, in order to set a setting value, a setting destination to which the setting value is set and a setting value to be set in the setting destination are previously defined in a storage means such as a ROM, and the state is changed. Makes settings according to the contents specified in the storage means.

JP 2002-000905 A

However, among the plurality of setting destinations of such gaming machines, there may be setting destinations having common setting values. In this case, there is a possibility that the data amount of memorize means increases.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the amount of data.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1, according to a predetermined control procedure, a control means for controlling a game, and a setting for performing a game-related setting as control data used for control by the control means. And a storage unit that stores at least a setting destination data group configured by a plurality of setting destination data indicating a destination, the control unit according to the control procedure from the setting destination data group stored in the storage unit. setting a read out process of reading setting target data in sequence, by the read out process each time one setting target data is read, the setting destination indicated by the read setting target data, a common set value predetermined The setting process to be set is repeatedly performed.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a plurality of control means for controlling the game according to a predetermined control procedure and a plurality of setting destinations for setting the game are set as control data used for the control by the control means. And a storage unit that stores at least a setting destination data group configured by the setting destination data, wherein the control unit sequentially sets the setting destination data from the setting destination data group stored in the storage unit according to the control procedure. The reading process for reading and the setting process for setting a predetermined common setting value to the setting destination indicated by the read setting destination data are repeated every time one setting destination data is read by the reading process. It is a thing .

This has the effect of reducing the amount of data stored in the storage means .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM in a main control apparatus, (b) shows typically the correspondence of the 1st hit classification counter C2 and the jackpot classification in a special symbol. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second random number counter C4 and the hit in the normal symbol. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the game result setting table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the state setting table. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the setting table at the time of jackpot completion, and (b) is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the clear table at the time of jackpot completion. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of various setting value storage areas. It is a schematic diagram which showed the structure of the register typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit judgment processing which is executed by the MPU inside the main control unit. 6 is a flowchart showing a jackpot setting process executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is the flowchart which showed the game result set value acquisition processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control control equipment. 6 is a flowchart showing a disconnection time setting process executed by an MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows a through gate passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot termination processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows data setting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the zero setting process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the starting-up process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM in the main-control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment, (b) schematically shows the content of the jackpot end setting / clear table in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM in the main-control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the content of the jackpot end initial value setting table in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot termination processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the zero setting process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape substantially the same as the outer frame 11 with respect to the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 18 serves as an opening / closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by the ball flowing down on the front surface of the game board 13. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided serves as an opening / closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the rear surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with its front surface protruding and the upper surface opened, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the balls thrown into the upper plate 17 are guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. Operated.

  The stage is a production mode in which various productions displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are made uniform, and in the pachinko machine 10, three stages of “a town stage”, an “empty stage”, and an “island stage”. There are two stages. Then, various effects such as a variation effect and a reach effect that are performed in association with the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting prize), which will be described later, are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. Has been done. The change of the stage is performed when the player operates the frame button 22 during a period in which no change effect is performed or during high-speed change. Every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “town stage” → “empty stage” is changed. ”→“ Island stage ”→“ City stage ”→ ... Immediately after the power is turned on, the "town stage" is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, in the third symbol display device 81, when the normal reach effect is started, when the normal reach is developed to the super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect contents at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided illumination portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED built therein. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when the jackpot or the reach production is performed, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right illumination portion 32 by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

  A ball rental operating unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on the information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a balance on the card or the like. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which a ball is directly lent to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to share a pachinko machine using a card unit with a cash machine.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a for pressing, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. (Not shown) and are built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes as a result, and thus the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, there is provided a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball-pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and has a large number of nails for guiding balls, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first prize. It is configured by assembling the ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80 and the like, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and wood screws are applied from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and divided by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (where a winning opening or the like is arranged, and a shot ball is It is the area that flows down.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. While being attenuated, it is bounced back toward the center. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn when a ball enters the first entrance 64, and a normal symbol (first when the ball passes through the second entrance 67). A lottery of 2 symbols) will be held. In the lottery of the special symbol performed for the entrance into the first entrance 64, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the jackpot type Is also determined. When it becomes a big hit of the special symbol, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds or until 10 balls are won). ) It is opened and the opening is repeated multiple times. As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, and thus a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are 13 types of special symbols as jackpot types: "hour saving jackpot A" to "hour saving jackpot C", and "probability variation jackpot A" to "probability variation jackpot J", and the jackpot ends after the special gaming state ends. As a later added value, a game value (game value) according to these jackpot types is given to the player. Although details will be described later, for example, when the jackpot type is “probable variation jackpot A”, a game value of shifting to a high probability state of a special symbol after the jackpot is given. Further, if the jackpot type is "time saving jackpot B", after the jackpot is finished, the gaming value that the time saving state of the normal symbol continues until the special symbol is drawn 30 times is given.

  Further, when the special symbol (first symbol) is selected, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, The special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entered balls is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the first symbol display. It is shown by the device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display ends in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 remains, a lottery for the next special symbol is performed and a variable display corresponding to the lottery. Is started. The specific winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player hits a ball to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that a large number of balls also enter the first winning opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64 is maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state.

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball in the second entrance 67, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol is hit. When the normal pattern hits, the electric accessory that accompanies the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It becomes a state. That is, when the normal symbol hits, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64, and as a result, the special symbol is easily selected by lottery.

  Further, when the regular symbol (second symbol) is drawn, the variable symbol of the ordinary symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) elapses, The ordinary symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the sphere passes through the second entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the first symbol display device 37. While being displayed, the second symbol holding lamp 84 is also displayed. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next ordinary symbol is selected by lottery and the variable display according to the lottery is performed. Is started.

  As described above, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, "normal jackpot", "time saving jackpot A", "hour saving jackpot B", "special jackpot A", "special jackpot B", and "probable variation jackpot A" ~ " There are 13 types of "Probability jackpot H".

  When the "normal jackpot" is reached, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 16 rounds (16 round jackpot), but no added value is given after the jackpot is over. That is, after the jackpot is finished, it shifts to a low probability state of the special symbol, and does not shift to the "time saving state of the normal symbol" (ordinary symbol time saving).

  When both "time saving jackpot A" and "time saving jackpot B", the number of rounds goes into a special game state of 16 rounds (16 round jackpot), and after that, as an added value after the jackpot ends, "ordinary symbol time saving state" (Transition to (Short-time and medium-sized design)). However, in "time saving jackpot A" and "time saving jackpot B", the period in which the "ordinary symbol saving time" (ordinary symbol saving time) continues is different. Specifically, “time saving jackpot A” does not depend on the state when the jackpot is won, and the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased from the end of the jackpot to the end of the special symbol lottery 20 times. On the other hand, the "time saving jackpot B" has a difference in the duration of the "ordinary symbol time saving state" depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if you win the "Short-time jackpot B" during the high probability state of the special symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases after the jackpot ends and the special symbol lottery ends 30 times. If you win the "Short-time jackpot B" during the low probability state of the symbol, the winning probability of the normal symbol increases from after the jackpot until the special symbol lottery ends 20 times. In the present embodiment, the number of times the special symbol is drawn defines the period during which the time saving state of the normal symbol continues, but for example, it may be defined by the number of times the fluctuation of the special symbol ends.

  In addition, if you win the "special jackpot A" or "special jackpot B", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 8 rounds (8 round jackpot), and thereafter, depending on the state before winning the jackpot, " Transition to "high probability state of special symbol", or "low probability state of special symbol", and transition to "time saving state of normal symbol". Specifically, if you win the "special jackpot A" or "special jackpot B" during the time saving of the regular symbols that are given after various types of time and jackpot, if you win the jackpot, move to the "high probability state of special symbols". To do. On the other hand, in a state other than the time saving of the normal symbol given after the completion of various time saving jackpots (that is, during the high probability state of the special symbol, or during the low probability state of the special symbol, and during the normal state of the normal symbol) If you win the "special jackpot A" or "special jackpot B", it shifts to the "time saving state of normal symbols". In addition, after the jackpot is over, "the time saving state of the ordinary symbol" is continued until the lottery for the special symbol is completed 20 times in the "special jackpot A", and the special symbol is in the "special jackpot B". It is until the lottery is completed 30 times.

  Furthermore, in "probability variation jackpot A" to "probability variation jackpot H", all become special gaming state, and then shift to "high probability state of special symbol" as added value after the jackpot. However, in “probable variation jackpot A” to “probable variation jackpot H”, the number of rounds of the jackpot and the operation pattern of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a are different from each other. Specifically, in "probable variation jackpot A" to "probable variation jackpot D", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 16 rounds (16 round jackpot), and in "probability variation jackpot E" to "probability variation jackpot H", the number of rounds is It becomes a special game state of 2 rounds (2 round jackpot).

  Further, in "probable variation jackpot A" and "probability variation jackpot F" to "probability variation jackpot H", in each round during the special gaming state, the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is another jackpot type. Is different from. Specifically, in "time saving jackpot A" to "hour saving jackpot C", "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot D" to "probability variation jackpot G", 30 seconds elapse in each round. Or the specific winning opening (large opening mouth) 65a is opened until 10 balls are won, whereas in the "probability variation jackpot C" and "probability variation jackpot H" to "probability variation jackpot J", In the round, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened until 0.5 seconds elapses or until 10 balls are won.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the upper limit is set for the number of times the game ball is shot (for example, 100 times at maximum per minute), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) within 0.5 seconds. ) It is extremely difficult to win 10 balls in 65a, and in most cases, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed before winning 10 balls. Therefore, with “probable variation jackpot C” and “probable variation jackpot H” to “probability variation jackpot J”, the number of prize balls per round that the player can obtain is smaller than that of other jackpot types.

  Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, a so-called probability state of the special symbol (during a change in the special symbol), in other words, a special game state (big hit) It is a state of the game that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, if it is not "high probability state of special symbol", it is called "low probability state of special symbol", this is a state where the jackpot probability is lower than the probability change state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbols). Further, the "time saving state of the normal symbol" (during the time saving of the regular symbol) is a state of the game in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. On the other hand, when it is not "time saving state of ordinary symbol", it is called "normal state of ordinary symbol", which means that the winning probability of ordinary symbol is normal, that is, the winning probability is lower than that during the time saving. ..

  After that, the period when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol after the special symbol big hit ends, that is, "hour saving big hit A" or "time saving big hit B" ends, and then the special symbol lottery Until the predetermined number of times (20 times, 30 times) is finished, it is called a time saving period of a normal symbol. In addition, in order to make the explanation easy to understand, the short time period of the normal symbol is shown by using the number of lottery of the special symbol. For example, if the predetermined number of times is 20 times, it is described that the time saving period of the normal symbol is 20 times. In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with various game states such as a jackpot state, a time saving state of a normal symbol, and a probability variation state of a special symbol, so that the player's interest is improved. There is.

  As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of jackpot according to the type of jackpot, the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening mouth) 65a in each round, and the state after the jackpot is finished. (Whether the special symbol is in the probable state or the normal symbol is in a time saving state) and each. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be the same regardless of the jackpot type, or the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a in each round may be the same regardless of the jackpot type. Further, for example, instead of changing the period of "time saving state of the normal symbol" according to the type of jackpot, the time to open the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 64 or once. It is also possible to change the number of times the electric accessory is released by hitting the ordinary pattern. Further, the number of rounds and the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a are not limited to the aspect of the present embodiment, and, for example, a big jackpot of 4 rounds or a jackpot of 9 rounds may be provided. The conditions for closing the winning opening (large opening) 65a include, for example, "3 seconds have passed or 10 balls have won" or "10 seconds have passed or 5 balls have won." A jackpot of the condition "until you do" may be provided. Further, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot, it is configured to shift to one of the "high probability state of the special symbol" or the "time saving state of the ordinary symbol", but the jackpot ends After the special symbol lottery ends a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times), it is always configured to be in the "high probability state of special symbol", and after the predetermined number of special symbol lottery ends, While shifting to the "low probability state of special symbol", it may be configured to be "time saving state of normal symbol" or "normal state of normal symbol".

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot type becomes "hour saving jackpot A", the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is continued after the "hour saving jackpot A" ends and the special symbol lottery ends 20 times, and "hour saving jackpot B" When it becomes ", the time saving state of the normal symbol is continued until the special symbol lottery is completed 20 times or 30 times after the end of the" hour saving big hit B ", but the duration of the time saving state may be arbitrarily set. .. For example, when the jackpot type is "time saving jackpot A", after the "hour saving jackpot A" ends the special symbol lottery continues until the special symbol lottery ends 60 times, and when "time saving jackpot B", The time saving state of the normal symbol may be continued until the special symbol lottery is completed 120 times after the "time saving jackpot B". Further, instead of the number of times the special symbol is drawn, the time saving state of the normal symbol may be continued until a predetermined time (for example, 2 minutes to 5 minutes) elapses.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot types (“time saving jackpot A”, “special jackpot A”, and “special jackpot A”) that differ the added value given to the player after the jackpot is finished according to the gaming state when the jackpot is won. Although a special jackpot B ") is provided, the added value given to the player after the jackpot is finished may be fixed regardless of the gaming state when the jackpot is won. For example, if you win the "Short-time jackpot A", regardless of the state when you hit the jackpot, the special symbol lottery will be continued until the special symbol lottery is finished 20 times after the jackpot is over. If you win the "special jackpot A" or "special jackpot B", regardless of the state at the time of jackpot winning, it may be configured to shift to a high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot.

  The first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side in the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform a variable display by changing the lighting state to indicate whether or not the special symbol lottery that is performed in association with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) is being performed, As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown in a lighting state, or fluctuation among the balls entered in the first ball entrance 64 is not executed. The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls), is indicated by a lighting state.

  If a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed in a variable manner on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of entry is suspended up to 4 times. , The number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reservations is not limited to four and is three or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, in the present embodiment, only one first ball entrance 64 is provided, but a plurality of first ball entrances 64 may be provided. In this case, the ball may be suspended for each type of the first ball inlet 64 into which the ball has entered. Further, when the variation is executed according to the reserved ball, the variation may be executed in the order in which the ball is entered without considering the type of the first entrance 64, or when the reserved ball is present. The first ball entrance 64 that preferentially executes the variation may be provided. When a plurality of first ball entrances 64 are provided, the jackpot winning probability or the selection ratio of each jackpot type may be changed according to the type of the first ball entrance 64.

  The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds in a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the light emission colors of the respective LEDs (for example, red, green, and blue) are different, and by combining the light emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs (high probability state of special symbols) Or, it is possible to display normal patterns such as reduced working hours. Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of fluctuation, but when it is a big hit, the big hit type ("normal big hit", "time saving big hit A "," Short-time jackpot B "," Special jackpot A "," Special jackpot B "," Probability variation jackpot A "to" Probability variation jackpot H ") special symbols (first symbol) are shown.

  Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), it is used as a trigger to perform variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) on the first symbol display device 37. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right. The columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main controller 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9". Each main design is formed by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear design consisting of a wooden box, of which the main designs with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are attached to the front of the wooden box with attached patterns simulating characters such as plane, furoshiki, and helmet. An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached design, and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached design.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 6) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is displayed.

  For example, if the special symbol lottery result is any one of "normal jackpot", "hour saving jackpot A", "hour saving jackpot B", "special jackpot A", "special jackpot B", an even number "0, The variable display in which the main symbols to which "2, 4, 6, 8" are added are arranged is displayed. In addition, if "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot E" to "probability variation jackpot H", variations in which main symbols having odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 9" except "7" are aligned If the display is performed and if the "probability variation jackpot B" to "probability variation jackpot D" (that is, if it is the most advantageous 16 round probability variation jackpot) for the player, the main symbol with the odd number "7" added The variable displays are displayed in a uniform manner. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of alignment, the variable display in which the main symbols having the same number are not arranged is displayed. With such a configuration, the jackpot type can be recognized only by confirming the aligned main symbols.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, other than that. The upper one-third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed on the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of numbers, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from the top to the bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol column Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol column Z2 and the right symbol column Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of the jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols in the present embodiment) is arranged on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is an area that displays the number of reserved balls that is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2. And Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, which suggests to the player that the jackpot is in a state where it is easier to make a transition to the big hit than usual. In the small area Ds2 in the center, usually, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy with a hachimaki) performs a predetermined motion, sometimes performs a special motion different from the predetermined motion, or another character appears. A notice production is performed by putting it out.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the maximum number of times of entry is four. The number of balls to be reserved is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved sphere number pattern is displayed for each reserved sphere number, and the number of reserved spheres is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved sphere number patterns. That is, when one reserved sphere number design is displayed in the small area Ds1, it means that the number of reserved spheres is one sphere, and when four reserved sphere count designs are displayed, the number of reserved spheres is It shows that it is four balls. If the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, but the maximum number of reserved balls is three times. It may be set to the number below or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating by a lighting state whether or not the lottery of the normal symbol that is performed along with the ball passing through the second entrance 67 is being performed, As a stop symbol after the end of the variation, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is shown in a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the sphere passes through the second ball entrance 67, the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped by a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○"), the electric accessory that accompanies the first entrance 64 operates for a predetermined time. The state is set (opened), and as a result, the ball is easily inserted into the first ball inlet 64. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed in the second symbol reserve lamp 84. It Four of the second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the passage of the ball in the second entrance 67 is not limited to the maximum number of reserved balls 4 times as in the case of the first entrance 64, and the number of times is 3 times or less, or 5 times or more. (For example, 8 times) may be set. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be lit.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first ball entrance switch. A lottery for special symbols is made by the main controller 110, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is also one of the prize holes through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally elongated rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main control device 110 is a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed so that the big hit is stopped. While making it, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is shown. After that, the game state transitions to the special game state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal time. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse, or 10 balls are won, or 0.5 seconds elapses, or a ball Will be released).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated a number of times according to the jackpot type. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

  The variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing on the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. It has and. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which a ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower side of the front face to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normally closed state. The state and the state operate alternately.

  The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display device 37 is turned on, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning is achieved. A special game state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is being opened. It may be formed.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It can be seen through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the outlet 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (fire control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

  The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

  Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to extend over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. To be cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, the tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and the downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A RAM 203, a register 210 for temporarily storing data necessary for reading and writing when reading various data from the ROM 202 or RAM 203, or writing various data to the RAM 203, and an interrupt circuit. Various circuits such as a timer circuit and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmitting / receiving circuit in order to instruct the sub control unit such as the payout control unit 111 and the voice lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 6A, in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as a part of the above-mentioned fixed value data, a first per random number table 202a, a first per type selection table 202b, and a second per random number table 202c. At least a fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, a game result setting table 202e, a state setting table 202f, a jackpot end time setting table 202g, and a jackpot end time clear table 202h are stored.

  The first hit random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which a big hit determination value of a first hit random number counter C1 described later is stored. The details of the first random number table 202a will be described later together with the description of the first random number counter C1.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 6B) is a data table in which the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the big hit type is set for each big hit type. The details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described later together with the description of the first hit type counter C2.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 6C) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. The details of the second random number table 202c will be described later together with the description of the second random number counter C4.

  The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) is a data table in which the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is set for each display mode. In this variation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the determination result of the special symbol big hit, the gaming state, etc. are defined. For example, it is a table for selecting a variation pattern at the time of a big hit, or a table for selecting a variation pattern at the time of a hit. In addition, there are a plurality of tables for selecting a variation pattern at the time of big hit, and different tables are selected for each big hit type. Further, there are a plurality of tables for selecting the variation pattern at the time of deviation, and for example, a table or the like that is selected only after the jackpot is finished is provided. The details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  In the game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 7), when a big hit is won, setting values such as a stop symbol indicating a big hit and an operation pattern of a specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a during the big hit are set. It is a data table specified for each jackpot type. The game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 7) is stored in the range of addresses "19D8H" to "1A2BH" of the ROM 202, and 1-byte data is stored at each address. In this game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 7), the number of judgment values (random number values) for each jackpot type (the number of judgment values), the lighting pattern (the number of display symbols) of the plurality of LEDs 37a, and the special symbol Information indicating a stop symbol (stop symbol information), an operation pattern of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a (large opening opening pattern), and a fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d are selected. Information (table selection information) indicating which one is selected from a plurality of tables for use in determining the variation pattern, and information (offset 1, offset 2) for determining the gaming state after the jackpot is over. ) And are specified. In FIG. 7, the address of the ROM 202 where each data is defined is shown in parentheses, but the upper byte of the address of the ROM 202 is omitted and only the lower byte is shown.

  In this pachinko machine 10, based on winning the jackpot, from the game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 7), the above setting values according to the winning jackpot type, various setting value storage area 203e of the RAM 203 (Figure 11)). Details of the various set value storage areas 203e will be described later. Then, on the basis of the set values stored in the various set value storage areas 203e, the MPU 201 performs various control related to a variation pattern effect that is a big hit and a big hit. In addition, in the various setting value storage area 203e (see FIG. 11), in addition to the storage area for storing the setting values related to the game, the offset 1 and the offset 2 defined in the game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 7) are set. An offset value storage area for storing the offset value calculated based on the above is provided. This offset value is a value used to set the game state after the jackpot is finished. The details will be described later, but refer to the offset 1 and the offset 2 in the game result set value acquisition process (see FIG. 17). Is a value calculated by

  Specifically, in the jackpot end process (see FIG. 26) executed when it is determined to be the jackpot end timing, various setting values related to the gaming state after the jackpot end (whether or not to be a high probability state of the special symbol) Is used to set various setting values in the various setting value storage areas 203e by selecting from the state setting table 202f (refer to FIG. 8) a setting value indicating, or a normal symbol time saving period. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the random number value (counter value) itself that is acquired in association with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) continues to be held until the end of the jackpot, and the disturbance thereof. The game state after the jackpot is over is not determined based on the numerical value (counter value), and the random number value (counter value) is acquired with the entrance into the first entrance 64 (start prize). Only the offset value selected on the basis of the big hit is held.

  Here, if it is configured to hold a random number value that is a jackpot during the variation pattern production at the time of jackpot winning and during the subsequent jackpot state, the jackpot random number is read by the unauthorized player Random value may be specified. Therefore, the timing at which the specified random number value appears may be analyzed, and the jackpot may be apt to be fraudulently assigned based on the analyzed timing. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the obtained random number value (counter value) is converted into a form of an offset value and held until the jackpot end time, and the gaming state after the jackpot end is set based on the offset value. Since it is configured as such, it is possible to limit the period in which the random number value itself which is a big hit of the special symbol is held for a short period. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally obtain a random number value that is a jackpot for a special symbol from outside, analyze the timing when the random number value that is a jackpot appears, and assign the jackpot based on the analyzed timing. Can be suppressed. Specifically, the analyzed timing is set on a so-called hanging board, a random number is acquired at the timing when a random number value that is a big hit appears, and the fraudulent act of controlling to determine whether the big hit is hit is suppressed. You can

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various setting values related to the gaming state after the jackpot is over (setting values indicating whether or not to be a high probability state of a special symbol, a short time period of a normal symbol, etc.) It is configured not to hold it during the variation pattern presentation during the above or during the subsequent big hit state, but to hold only the offset value that is the value indicating the storage position of each set value in the state setting table 202f. .. Since the RAM 203 does not need to have a storage area for temporarily storing all of the various setting values but only needs to have an area for holding the offset value, the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently. You can

  Next, the state setting table 202f of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. This state setting table 202f (see FIG. 8) is a table in which the gaming state that can be transferred after the end of the big hit is defined for each offset value, and when it is determined that it is the end timing of the big hit (S1207: Yes). It is a data table that is referred to for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end in the jackpot end process (S1208) executed in step S1.

  The state setting table 202f (see FIG. 8) is stored in the range of addresses 1AD4H to 1AF3H of the ROM 202, and 1-byte data is stored at each address. This state setting table 202f (see FIG. 8), information indicating whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends (lottery state of the special symbol), and shifts to the time saving state of the ordinary symbol after the jackpot ends. Information indicating whether or not to make (normal symbol state), the short period of time of the normal symbol that is given after the end of the jackpot (the number of shortened times), and the variation pattern selection table 202d for selecting the mode of the variation pattern after the jackpot. From the table for use, the number of lottery of special symbols required to switch to the table according to the state (the number of times of changing the variation pattern selection table) is defined. Further, in FIG. 8, the address of the ROM 202 where each data is defined is shown in parentheses, but the upper byte of the address of the ROM 202 is omitted and only the lower byte is shown.

  In addition, the information indicating whether or not to shift to the time saving state of the normal symbol (state of the normal symbol) is provided with four types of states of the normal state, the time saving state 1, the time saving state 2, and the time saving state 3. .. If the normal state is set as the state of the normal symbol, the normal symbol shifts to the normal state after the jackpot is over. On the other hand, when any one of the time saving state 1 to the time saving state 3 is set, it shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol after the end of the big hit. In addition to these, the four states are different from each other in the tables used for determining the variation pattern after the number of times the variation pattern selection table is switched. That is, when performing the variation pattern effect for the deviation, which of the plurality of tables defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d is used to determine the variation pattern effect is different in the above four states. ing.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the offset value calculated from the offset 1 and the offset 2 defined in the game result setting table 202e based on winning the jackpot is held in the offset value storage area, At the end of the big hit, the set value corresponding to the offset value is extracted from the state setting table 202f and stored in the various set value storage area 203e.

  A random number value (counter value) acquired with the entry into the first entry slot 64 (starting winning) is converted into an offset value and held until the jackpot end time, and the jackpot is awarded based on the offset value. Since it is configured to set the game state after the end, it is possible to limit the period in which the random number value itself which is a big hit of the special symbol is held for a short period. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally obtain a random number value that is a jackpot for a special symbol from outside, analyze the timing when the random number value that is a jackpot appears, and assign the jackpot based on the analyzed timing. Can be suppressed. Specifically, the analyzed timing is set on a so-called hanging board, a random number is acquired at the timing when a random number value that is a big hit appears, and the fraudulent act of controlling to determine whether the big hit is hit is suppressed. You can

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various setting values related to the gaming state after the jackpot is over (the lottery state of the special symbol, the state of the ordinary symbol, the number of times saved and the number of times the variation pattern selection table is switched) before the jackpot game is started. Since it is configured to hold only the offset value, which is a value indicating the storage position of various setting values in the state setting table 202f, rather than being specified and stored in advance in the RAM 203, the RAM 203 has an offset until the end of the jackpot. It is sufficient to provide only the storage area for holding the value. Therefore, the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9, a jackpot end time setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A) and a jackpot end time clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B) defined in the ROM 202 will be described. In order to rewrite these tables in the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 26), the jackpot medium setting values set in various setting value storage areas 203e described later are initialized to the normal game state medium setting. Is a table in which the control data of is defined.

  The jackpot end-time setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A) is a table stored in the range of addresses 1202H to 1204H of the ROM 202, and 1-byte data is stored at each address. Specifically, at each of the addresses “1202H” to “1204H” of the ROM 202, the address data indicating the storage position of the data to be reset in the various set value storage area 203e (see FIG. 7) and the address data are stored. Data for setting to the storage position of the data shown (data for resetting the set value indicating that the jackpot is in progress) and data for ending the process of initializing the game state setting area are stored in the order of addresses. There is. Although details will be described later, in the data setting process (see FIG. 27) which is one process of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 26), the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 sets the jackpot end time setting table 202g (see FIG. )), The stored data is read in the order of the addresses of the ROM 202, and the control according to the stored data is executed. Specifically, when the address data is read, the address is set as the data setting destination address. When the set value data (data for resetting the set value) is read, the contents of the address set as the set destination address are reset (that is, "00H" is set to the set destination address). ). Further, when it is determined that the read data is the data for ending the process, the data setting process (see FIG. 27) is ended.

  Next, the jackpot end-time clear table 202h will be described with reference to FIG. The big hit end clear table 202h is a table stored in the range of the addresses "1205H" to "1212H" of the ROM 202, and each address defines the addresses of various set value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 11). There is. Although details will be described later, in the zero setting process (see FIG. 28), which is one of the jackpot ending processes, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 stores the stored data in the order of the addresses of the ROM 202 from the jackpot end clear table 202h. "00H" (initial value data) is set as a set value to the address indicated by the read stored data (address data). If the data read from the big hit end clear table 202h is "00H", the zero setting process ends.

  The jackpot completion clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B) defines the setting destination address of each setting value storage area 203e and the setting data (that is, "00H") for setting the setting destination address. With such a configuration, there is a problem that the amount of data in the clear table 202h at the end of the jackpot increases. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the processing of defining only the setting destination address in the jackpot completion clear table 202h and setting "00H" to the setting destination address is performed by the control program of the MPU 201. Stipulated in. Therefore, the amount of data in the big hit end clear table 202h can be reduced, so that the amount of data stored in the ROM 202 can be reduced.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a condition for ending the data setting process (see FIG. 27) and the zero setting process (see FIG. 28), the number of times of setting data in the various set value storage areas 203e is set in the control program. "00H" is output from the jackpot end setting table 202g and the jackpot end clear table 202h without setting the processing to end when it is determined that the data has been set for the set number of times. The processing is terminated when it is determined that the data has been read as.

  When the set number of times is described in the control program, the control program designer newly counts the number of set values each time the number of set values changes due to circumstances such as diversion of the program to another model. It is necessary to rewrite the control program according to the counted number. Therefore, in addition to the time and effort required to count the set values, if the designer makes a mistake, the control program will specify an incorrect number of repetitions, so the settings at the end of the jackpot will be completed normally. It may not be possible to cause the pachinko machine 10 to malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is only necessary to define "00H" as data at the end of the jackpot end time setting table 202g and the jackpot end clear table 202h, and therefore, when designing the control program. The possibility that the designer makes a mistake can be reduced. Therefore, the data setting at the end of the jackpot can be executed more reliably based on the control program, so that the malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

  Next, the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters and flags for controlling the processing of the main controller 110, a storage area for storing set values, and the like. Here, with the processing of the main control device 110, special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and third symbol display This is a main process of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting of display in the device 81.

  First, with reference to FIG. 10, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, lottery for special symbols, lottery for ordinary symbols, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37, setting of display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting of display on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform the above.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first per random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for the, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type out of the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used to set the initial value of the first random number counter C1. A counter CINI1 and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern are used. Moreover, the random number counter C4 per second is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the random number counter C4 per second. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 24). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance ball. The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored at the timing of entering the ball 64. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored at the timing of passing through one of the second entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64. It is stored in the storage area 203a. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the first per random number table 202a (see FIG. 6A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the per first random number counter C1. When the value matches the value of the random number which is the big hit set by the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined as the big hit of the special symbol. Further, the first random number table 202a is for a low probability of a special symbol (a period of being a low probability state of a special symbol), and at a high probability of a high probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol than at the time of that low probability (special. It is divided into two types, ie, a period for which the symbol has a high probability state), and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed at a low probability of a special symbol and at a high probability of a special symbol. The first random number table 202a1 (not shown) for high probability of special symbols and the first per random number table 202a2 (not shown) for low probability of special symbols are of the main controller 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 149). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 149 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 149), the value returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated regularly (once in each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol hold of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

  Here, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is when the special symbol is removed.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit for the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is the one when the special symbol is a big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first random number counter C1, at the time of low probability of the special symbol, there are three random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol, and the random number value "7,107,282" is the first for low probability. It is stored in the hit random number table 202a. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 300, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 3, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is "1/100".

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 30 random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol, and the values are "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 "is a first random number table for high probability time. It is stored in 202a. In this way, at the time of high probability of special symbols, the total number of random number values is 300, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 30, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

  In the present embodiment, the random number value which is a big hit stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability and the random number which is a big hit stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability. Random numbers that are jackpots are set so that they do not overlap with numerical values. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a jackpot random number regardless of the status of the pachinko machine 10, the timing at which the value appears is analyzed, and the jackpot is illegally assigned based on the analyzed timing. It may be easier. On the other hand, like the present embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), the random number value to be a big hit is changed. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to predict a random number value that is a big hit for the special symbol, and thus it is possible to suppress fraud.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 149. Then, as shown in FIG. 6B, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random number value is "0 to 19" is "normal big hit". The jackpot type when the value is "20 to 29" is "hour saving jackpot A", and the jackpot type when the value is "30 to 39" is "hour saving jackpot B". The jackpot type when the value is "40 to 69" is "special jackpot A", and the jackpot type when the value is "70 to 97" is "special jackpot B".

  Further, when the random number value is "98,99", the jackpot type is "probable variation jackpot A", and when the value is "100 to 102", the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B", and the value is When the value is "103 to 105", the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot C", and when the value is "106 to 113", the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot D". In addition, the jackpot type when the value is "114 to 129" is "probable variation jackpot E", and the jackpot type when the value is "130 to 145" is "probable variation jackpot F" and the value is When it is "146, 147", the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot G", and when the value is "148, 149", the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot H".

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment uses 13 types of hit types (normal jackpot, time saving jackpot A, saving time jackpot B, special jackpot A, and special jackpot B) according to the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. , Probability variation big hit A to probability variation big hit H) are determined. From the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2, a random number value for determining the jackpot type of the special symbol is set by a special symbol jackpot type table (not shown), and this table is It is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disengagement displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. Stop before and after "rear out of reach" (for example, 98, 99), and after the same reach is reached, the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol "reach other than out of front and rear" (for example, in the range of 90 to 97), Three stop (effect) patterns of "complete disengagement" (for example, a range of 0 to 89) that does not reach are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol holding ball storage in the RAM 203 is stored at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a.

  From the value of the stop type selection counter C3 (random number value), the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown). This table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a high probability of special symbols and a low probability of special symbols, and a range of random number values set for each outage stop type according to the table. Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a special symbol, or the like.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a jackpot is likely to occur, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary, so that the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "complete deviation" is 0 to 89, which is a wide table for high probability. Is selected, and it becomes easy to select “completely off”. In this table, the "front-rear outreach" is narrowed to 98,99 and the "reach other than front-rear outreach" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, and it is difficult to select "rear-rear outreach" or "reach other than front-rear-reach". Further, in the low probability state, in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first entrance 64, the range of the random number value corresponding to the "completely out" stop type is as small as 0 to 79 Table is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "Completely missed".

  In this stop type selection table, the range of the random number values corresponding to the stop types of "reach other than out-of-front / back" is as wide as 80 to 97, and "reach other than out-of-front-rear" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, since many reach displays having a long effect time can be performed, it is possible to secure a ball entry time into the first entrance 64, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. Easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "out-of-front / rear reach" is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called normal reach or super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 26) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 6A) storing a random number value for determining one variation time of the symbol variation from the variation type counter CS1 value (random number value) is the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided inside.

  In the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, for example, as fluctuation patterns for disconnection, "disconnection (for long time)", "disconnection (for short time)", "disconnection normal reach", "disconnection super reach", "disconnection" Various types of "Special reach" are stipulated, and various types of variation patterns for big hits are defined, such as "normal winning reach", "super reach" types, and "special reach" types. "Various types," shared super reach "types," shared special reach "types are stipulated.

  As described above, the variation pattern selection table 202d is composed of a plurality of tables according to the state of the pachinko machine 10. For example, when the jackpot is won, the tables to be selected differ depending on the jackpot type, and which table is used to select the variation pattern is determined in the game result setting table 202e (see FIG. 7) for each jackpot type. It is determined according to the prescribed table selection information. If the table for selecting the variation pattern is different, for example, among the various types of "hit super reach", the type of "hit super reach" that is easy to select for a particular jackpot type, or "hit super reach" that is selected only for a particular jackpot type A "reach" type can be provided. Therefore, the jackpot type can be predicted from the type of the variation pattern, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, even when the special symbol lottery result is out of place, the table used for selecting the variation pattern is different depending on whether the state of the normal symbol is the normal state or the time saving states 1 to 3. Is configured. With this configuration, it is possible to predict the current gaming state from the type of fluctuation pattern.

  The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed the second entrance (through gate) 67 on either the left or the right. It is acquired at the time of being performed and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by the second random number table (see FIG. 6C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. , When it matches the value of the random number which is a hit set by the second hit random number table 202c, it is determined to be a hit of a normal symbol. Further, the second random number table 202c is for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period when the normal symbol is in a normal state), and a high probability that the probability of hitting a normal symbol is higher than the low probability (normal symbol). (For a period of time saving state), and the number of random numbers included in each of which is a big hit is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the ordinary symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 6C, at the time of low probability of the normal symbol, there are 24 random number values that are the hits of the ordinary symbol, and the range thereof is “5 to 28”. These random number values are stored in the random number table per normal symbol for low probability. In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 24, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

  When the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first ball entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for “0.5 seconds × 2 times”.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the ordinary symbol, there are 200 random numbers that are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the random table per normal symbol for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and since the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 200, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is "1 / 1.2".

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the second entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 is a normal symbol. Is displayed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the first entrance 64 is opened for “1 second × 2 times”. In this way, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, compared with the time of low probability of the regular symbol, the time for the variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period is extremely long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. Incidentally, a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit is provided in the ROM 202 from the value of the second hit random number counter C4 (random number value). In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the first entrance 64 is opened for “1 second × 2 times”, but is opened. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 24).

  In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main controller 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are selected according to the value of this counter or the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 10, the RAM 203 stores a stack area in which the contents of the register 210 of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

  It should be noted that the RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer when the power is cut off (including the occurrence of a power failure; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register of the register 210. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power-on by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 24) when the power is shut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is performed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 23). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Further, the RAM 203, as shown in FIG. 5, a special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding sphere storing area 203b, a special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d, and various settings. It has a value storage area 203e and a probability variation flag 203f.

  The special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first random number counter C1. , The first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas from the 1st area to the 4th reserved area, the areas having the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the reserved first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbols are selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a are shifted to the execution area. Then, (moved), based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, the determination such as a lottery for special symbols is performed.

  When data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into the holding area having a smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the holding areas (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (starting prize) and each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired in accordance with the starting prize, the original special symbol jackpot lottery Separately, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired respective values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the lottery of the original special symbol is performed, based on the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) corresponding to the start winning, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is performed. Predicting will be described as reading the special symbol lottery result in advance. In addition, as various information, hit / miss, stop type, variation pattern, and the like are applicable.

  Then, when the pre-reading is completed, the winning information command including various information (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp controlling device 113 extracts the win / fail, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command and uses them as winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 223. 223a.

  Like the special symbol holding sphere storing area 203a, the normal symbol holding sphere storing area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right second entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding Among the vacant areas of the (fourth area), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main controller 110, when a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserve ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

  In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the prizes stored in other reserved areas are stored in the same manner as the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed in which data is packed in a reserved area having a smaller area number by one. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, the variable display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry slot 64 (starting winning) This is a counter for counting the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to 4 times. The initial value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of holding balls in variable display increases, up to a maximum value of 1 They are added (see S604 in FIG. 19). On the other hand, the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 of FIG. 14).

  The value of this special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding number N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (S206 of FIG. 18, see S605 of FIG. 20). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed, and holds the variable display hold ball in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. Thereby, the number of balls for variable display managed by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the number of balls for actual variable display held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated, the deviation can be corrected by the number of reserved balls received next.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the number of holding balls command, and the display holding device for notifying the number of holding balls to the display control device 114 each time the number of holding balls changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the command for number of reserved balls for display.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, the number of holding balls (standby number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67 and the number of holding balls for variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. (See S804 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S705 of FIG. 20).

  When the sphere passes through either the right or left second entrance 67, if the value of this ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203d (holding number M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol) is less than 4, a second random number per The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b (S805 in FIG. 21). On the other hand, when the sphere passes through either the right or left second entrance 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Not performed (S803: No in FIG. 21).

  The various set value storage area 203e is a storage area in which various set values, flags, counters and the like for executing main processing of the pachinko machine 10 are stored. The MPU 201 performs control based on the data stored in the various setting value storage area 203e. The various set value storage areas 203e will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various set value storage areas 203e of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 11, the various set value storage area 203e (see FIG. 11) corresponds to the range of addresses “F000H” to “F0FFH” of the RAM 203. In the various set value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 11), the firing control signal set value storage area assigned to the address "F000H" of the RAM 203 stores the set values for controlling the firing of the sphere. This is an area, and the firing of a ball to the game area is controlled based on the set value stored in this area.

  The display LED setting area assigned to the address “F009H” of the RAM 203 is a storage area that stores the setting value of the lighting pattern for turning on the display LED, and is based on the setting value stored in this area. To turn on the display LED.

  The test signal setting area 1 and the test signal setting area 2, which are respectively assigned to the addresses “F01DH” and “F01EH”, are storage areas for storing set values for outputting various test signals. Examples of the test signal include a signal for performing an operation test of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and a signal for performing an operation test at the time of a big hit. Since it is a test signal, a signal is not output while the player is playing a game on the pachinko machine 10 (that is, "00H" is set as a set value in both the test signal setting areas 1 and 2).

  The maximum round number setting area assigned to the address "F030H" is an area for setting the number of rounds per jackpot. For example, if you win a jackpot type with 2 rounds of jackpots, such as the probability variation jackpot E, "02H" is set as the setting value, and the number of jackpots such as special jackpot A or special jackpot B is If you win the jackpot of 8 rounds, the setting value is set to "08H", and if you win the jackpot of 16 rounds such as the normal jackpot and the short-time jackpot A, the setting value is "10H". Is set.

  The game state setting area assigned to the address “F035H” of the RAM 203 is a storage area in which a set value indicating the current game state is stored. For example, if the stored set value is “01H” , Indicates that the special symbol is fluctuating, if "02H" indicates that the special symbol is confirmed and displayed, and if "03H", it is a big hit, and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed. The state is in the state, and if "04H", it means that the jackpot is in the midst of jackpot and the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is in the open state. If it is "00H", it is in a state other than the above (that is, the state from the end of the big hit until the change of the special symbol is started or the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the state where there is no holding ball. The state after a certain time has elapsed) is shown.

  The jackpot flag assigned to the address "F090H" is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot state (special game state) is currently in progress, and if it is on (that is, the stored data is "01H"). If) indicates that the special symbol is in the jackpot, if off (that is, if the stored data is "00H"), a state other than the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, the special symbol) Fluctuation state and a demo state). The storage areas assigned to the subsequent addresses “F091H” to “F094H” are areas for setting the data read from the state setting table 202f of the ROM 202.

  First, the probability variation state flag assigned to the address “F091H” is a flag indicating whether or not the special symbol is currently undergoing probability variation, and if it is on (that is, the stored data is “01H”). If), it indicates that the special symbol is in probable change, and if it is off (that is, if the stored data is "00H"), it indicates that the special symbol has a low probability state. ..

  Further, the time saving state flag assigned to the address "F092H" indicates whether or not the time saving of the normal symbol is in progress, and a set value for designating a table for selecting the mode of the variation pattern at the time of deviation. Is stored. If the flag is "00H", it indicates that the normal symbol is in the normal state, and if the flag is "01H", it indicates that the normal symbol is in the time saving state 1, and if the flag is "02H". For example, it indicates that it is the time saving state 2 of the normal symbol, and if the flag is "03H", it indicates that it is the time saving state 3 of the normal symbol. As described above, the time saving states 1 to 3 of the normal symbols are different in that the tables used for selecting the variation pattern at the time of deviation are different from each other after the variation pattern selection table switching times have passed. .. As described above, all the tables are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d.

  The time saving state counter assigned to the address "F093H" shifts to a low probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot is finished, and when the time shifts to the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, the number of times of saving the ordinary symbol remains. It is a counter that shows whether or not. In addition, when it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot, the time saving state of the normal symbol continues until the next jackpot is won, but the time saving state counter is 0 regardless of the number of lottery of the special symbol. is there. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the probability variation state flag is on or the value of the time saving state counter is 1 or more, control of the time saving state of the normal symbol is executed.

  The fluctuation selection state counter assigned to the address “F094H” is a counter that indicates the number of lottery for the remaining special symbols until the table for selecting the fluctuation pattern effect is switched to another table. If this counter is 1 or more, the dedicated variation pattern selection table after the jackpot is selected as the table for selecting the variation pattern at the time of deviation. On the other hand, when the value of the variation selection state counter is 0, the variation pattern is determined from the table according to the gaming state indicated by the time saving state flag.

  The offset value storage area assigned to the address “F095H” is a storage area for storing the offset value, and the setting value after the jackpot is read from the state setting table 202f based on the stored offset value. , RAM 203 addresses “F091H” to “F094H” are set. This offset value is calculated from the offset 1 and offset 2 values read from the game result table 202e when it is determined to be a big hit in the special symbol lottery, and is stored in the offset value storage area. In addition, the initial value "00H" is overwritten in the reading of the set value from the state setting table 202f and the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) executed after the setting is completed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various random number values (counter values) acquired with the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting winning) are converted into offset values and stored as offset values. Stored in the area and configured to set the gaming state after the jackpot based on the offset value, so the period during which the random number value that is the jackpot of the special symbol itself is held is limited to a short period be able to. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally obtain a random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol from the outside. Therefore, it is possible to analyze the timing at which a random number value that becomes a big hit appears, and to suppress fraudulent acts that illegally assign a big hit based on the analyzed timing. Specifically, the analyzed timing is set on a so-called hanging board, a random number is acquired at the timing when a random number value that is a big hit appears, and the fraudulent act of controlling to determine whether the big hit is hit is suppressed. You can The various random number values (counter values) are the first random number counter C1 and the first random number counter C1 stored in the respective counter buffers of the RAM 203 in association with the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting winning). It means the values of the hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the like.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various setting values to be set in the addresses "F091H" to "F094H" as the gaming state after the jackpot is finished (special symbol lottery state, ordinary symbol state, shortened times, fluctuations) The pattern selection table switching count) is not specified and held in advance before the jackpot game is started, but only the offset value, which is a value indicating the storage position of various setting values in the state setting table 202f, is held. Since the RAM 203 is configured, it is sufficient to provide only the storage area for the offset value storage area of 1 byte in the RAM 203. Therefore, the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently.

  The large opening setting area assigned to the address “F096H” is a storage area in which a setting value indicating the opening pattern of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a during the big hit is stored. Referenced when the jackpot flag is on). The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with five kinds of set values of "00H" to "04H". When the set value is "00H", 16 round jackpots and when "01H", 8 round jackpots. , "02H" is a 16-round short open jackpot (a special winning opening (big open mouth) 65a is open for 0.5 seconds in each round, a 16-round jackpot), and "03H" is a 2-round jackpot. “04H” corresponds to a 2-round short opening jackpot (a 2-round jackpot in which the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened for a maximum of 0.5 seconds in each round).

  The stop symbol code information storage area assigned to the address "F097H" is an area for setting information on the stop symbol of the special symbol based on the lottery result of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out, a stop symbol code indicating the stop symbol corresponding to the out is set, and if the lottery result is a hit, the stop symbol code according to the jackpot type is read from the game result setting table 202e. Issued and set. Then, at the end of the variation of the special symbol, the stop symbol corresponding to the set value set in the stop symbol code information storage area is confirmed and displayed on the first symbol display device 37.

  Addresses "F09FH" to "F0FFH" are unused areas, and the data stored in these areas is fixed to "00H". It should be noted that various setting values are assigned to the addresses other than those described above in the various setting value storage area 203e. Although description is omitted, for example, various counters such as a winning counter that counts the number of balls winning the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and the time for switching the display of the ordinary symbol in the variation effect of the ordinary symbol are measured. Various timers such as a normal symbol display switching timer are assigned.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to centrally store various set values, counters, timers, etc. in the various set value storage area 203e in which the upper byte of the address of the RAM 203 is F0H. A ring buffer for storing a command to be output to the voice lamp control device 113 or the like (for example, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, etc.), a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball number storage area 203b, a stack area For example, the upper byte of the address of the RAM 203 is configured to be stored in an address other than "F0H" (for example, an address whose upper byte is "F1H").

  Next, the register 210 provided in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. The register 210 is for reading the data from the ROM 202 and the RAM 203, temporarily storing the address data and the setting value data when writing the setting value to the RAM 203, and performing the arithmetic processing on the stored setting value. Is. As shown in FIG. 12, the register 210 includes an accumulator 210a capable of executing arithmetic processing on the stored data and a general-purpose register 210b1, 210b2, 210c1, 210c2, 210d1, 210d2 capable of storing address data and setting value data. A flag register 210e for storing various flags, and an address holding register 210f for storing the upper byte (F0H) of the address in the various set value storage area 203e as a fixed value. The accumulator 210a can also be used to temporarily store data, like the general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2.

  Each register provided in the register 210 is configured to be able to hold 1-byte data. Further, the general-purpose register 210b1 and the general-purpose register 210b2, the general-purpose register 210c1 and the general-purpose register 210c2, and the general-purpose register 210d1 and the general-purpose register 210d2 can be used in pairs. That is, the data of 2 bytes in total can be stored in each pair of registers. The data of 2 bytes corresponds to, for example, the address data of the ROM 202, the address data of the RAM 203, and the like.

  The flag register 210e is provided with a different flag for each bit of 1 byte. The provided flag is, for example, a zero flag that is turned off if the operation result after executing the instruction is a value other than zero, and is turned on if it is zero, or data stored in any of the general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2. There is a load flag or the like that turns off when the data is other than "00H" and turns on when the data is "00H".

  The control when reading and writing data will be described below. Here, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with various commands for executing various controls of the main controller 110, and the reading and writing of data is performed by using one of the various commands. Executed by using. Specifically, for example, a transfer instruction is provided that specifies a read source and a setting destination and transfers the data stored in the transfer source to the setting destination.

  In this transfer instruction, at least one of the reading source and the setting destination needs to specify the accumulator 210a provided in the register 210 or one of the general-purpose registers (general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2). is there. Therefore, for example, when the data defined in the address “1ADAH” of the ROM 202 is read and the read data is stored in the address “F093H” of the RAM 203, it is necessary to transfer the data via the general-purpose register 210b1, for example. Specifically, first, the address "1ADAH" is read out, the general-purpose register 210b1 is set as the setting destination, and the data specified by the address "1ADAH" is stored in the general-purpose register 210b1 using a transfer instruction. Then, using the general-purpose register 210b1 as the read source and the address "F093H" as the setting destination, the transfer instruction is performed again to set the data stored in the general-purpose register 210b1 to the address "F093H". By controlling in this way, the data defined in the address “1ADAH” of the ROM 202 can be transferred to the address “F093H” of the RAM 203 via the general-purpose register 210b1.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a 2-byte read instruction (load instruction) is provided as a transfer instruction that the MPU 201 can accept. The 2-byte read instruction (load instruction) is an instruction for reading the data specified by the specified read source and transferring it to the specified setting destination. In the 2-byte read command, the address of the ROM 202 or the RAM 203 can be designated as the reading source or the setting destination. In this case, it is necessary to specify both the upper byte and the lower byte of the addresses of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, like the 2-byte read instruction (load instruction), the 1-byte read instruction is an instruction for reading the data specified by the specified read source and transferring it to the specified setting destination. Instructions are provided. This 1-byte read instruction is different from the 2-byte read instruction (load instruction) in that it is used when reading data from a specific storage area or transferring data to a specific storage area. The specific storage area refers to a storage area in which the fixed value data stored in the address holding register 210f is used as the upper byte of the address. As described above, since "F0H" is stored in the address holding register 210f, the 1-byte read instruction is an area in which the address is in the range of "F000H" to "F0FFH", that is, various set value storage areas of the RAM 203. It is used when data is transferred to 203e, or conversely, when data is read from various set value storage areas 203e.

  Since the 1-byte read instruction is defined to include reading and writing from the area where the upper byte of the address is "F0H", the upper byte of the address is specified when the read source address or the setting destination address is specified. It is sufficient to omit the bytes and describe only the lower byte of the address in the program, which has the advantage of reducing the program capacity.

  Here, when various settings such as the setting at the start of fluctuation, the setting during big hit, the setting after end of big hit, and the like are set, data is set in the various set value storage area 203e. Therefore, in the control program, the frequency of describing the process of setting some data in the various set value storage area 203e increases. If all these settings are described by a 2-byte read instruction, there is a problem that the program capacity increases. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the MPU 201 is configured to be able to read the above-mentioned 1-byte read instruction, and further, the upper bytes of the addresses of the various set value storage areas 203e are all "F0H". As described above, the data storage position of the RAM 203 is adjusted. As a result, a command for setting data to the various set value storage areas 203e, which is frequently set during the game by the pachinko machine 10, can be described by a 1-byte read command in the control program. Therefore, when there are a plurality of upper bytes of the address in the various set value storage area 203e (for example, some data are stored in the area where the upper byte of the address is “F0H”, and some data have the upper byte of the address). It is possible to reduce the capacity of the control program as compared with the case of being stored in the "F1H" area).

  Here, the difference between the 2-byte read instruction and the 1-byte read instruction will be described more specifically, taking as an example the case where the data stored in the general-purpose register 210b1 is stored in the address “F093H” of the RAM 203.

  In the 2-byte read instruction, the data stored in the general-purpose register 210b1 is set to the address "F093H" by designating the data indicating the general-purpose register 210b1 as the reading source and further designating the address "F093H" as the setting destination. can do. That is, in one transfer instruction, it is necessary to describe in the program a total of 3 bytes of 1-byte data indicating the general-purpose register 210b1 and 2-byte address data “F093H”.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte read instruction is used, the data indicating the general register 210b1 is designated as the read source in common with the 2-byte read instruction, but the lower byte of the address "F093H" is set as the setting destination. The difference is that only a certain "93H" needs to be specified. That is, in one transfer instruction, it is sufficient to describe a total of 2 bytes of data including 1-byte data indicating the general-purpose register 210b1 and 1-byte address data "93H". Compared to this, the program description amount can be reduced by 1 byte. Further, in the various set value storage area 203e, various set values related to the game are stored, such as set values related to ball firing, set values related to the LED 37a, and set values for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. Data is read and written frequently. Therefore, in the control program of the pachinko machine 10, the description of the transfer command that designates any address in the various set value storage areas 203e as the read source or the set destination frequently appears. Therefore, the program capacity can be reduced by using the 1-byte read instruction instead of the 2-byte read instruction for all of these transfer instructions.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the various set value storage areas 203e in which data is frequently set are configured so that the upper byte of the address in the RAM 203 falls within the range of "F0H". Therefore, “F0H” is selected as the higher address of the read source or the setting destination when the 1-byte read instruction is executed in a form matching with this, but the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, the addresses of the various setting value storage areas 203e are set to "FF00H" to "FFFFH", and in accordance therewith, "FFH" is set as the read source or the higher address of the setting destination when the 1-byte read instruction is executed. May be selected. Note that when changing the upper address of the reading source or the setting destination to “FFH”, “FFH” may be stored as fixed value data in the address holding register 202f.

  Further, for example, in the ROM 202, the upper byte of an address that is frequently read is set as the upper address of the reading source or the setting destination when the 1-byte read instruction is executed (that is, a fixed value in the address holding register 202f). It may be set as data). As the frequently read address, for example, the address of the first random number table 202a that is referred to each time the special symbol is drawn, or the game result setting table 202e that is referred to each time when the special symbol is determined to be a big hit Address.

  In the above example, when the upper byte of the address of the game result setting table 202e is stored as fixed value data, the game result setting table 202e is stored in the addresses "19D1H" to "1A2BH" of the ROM 202. When reading data, there are cases where the upper byte of the address is “19H” and cases where it is “1AH”. On the other hand, since only one byte of data can be stored in the address holding register 202f, only one of "19H" and "1AH" can be stored in the address holding register 202f. On the other hand, the game result setting table 202e may be configured so that the addresses of the ROM 202 defined therein are shifted so that all the data are defined within a range in which the upper byte of the address is common.

  Further, according to the game state to be changed, the upper byte of the address is configured to set a set value in a different storage area, and the target area when executing the 1-byte transfer instruction is changed according to the game state. You may comprise. For example, in the various setting value storage areas 203e, the setting value for setting the gaming state during jackpot is stored in the range where the upper byte of the address is "F0H", and the gaming state after the jackpot is finished is set. The set value is stored in the range where the upper byte of the address is “F1H”. Then, when setting the gaming state during the jackpot, the fixed value "F0H" is overwritten in the address holding register 202f, and the data is read and written from the area where the upper byte of the address is "F0H" in the 1-byte read instruction. It should be set so that On the other hand, at the end of the big hit, when setting the gaming state after the end of the big hit, the fixed value "F1H" is overwritten in the address holding register 202f, and the upper byte of the address in the 1-byte read instruction reads and writes data from the area of "F1H". It should be set so that As a result, the data stored in the various set value storage areas 203e increases, and even if all the data cannot fit in the area where the upper byte of the address is the same, the 1-byte read instruction is used. Therefore, the program capacity can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via an input / output port 205. To send.

  Further, the input / output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processing is executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch handle 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). Display) and continuous notice effects such as setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 are controlled. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the situation of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern table 222a that defines a plurality of variation pattern effects to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the fluctuation pattern command output from main controller 110 is received, the mode of the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected from this fluctuation pattern table 222a. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, and a stop type selection flag 223d.

  The prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and prize information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control unit 110 has a start prize, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start prize. From, from the main control unit 110, various information (win / fail, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated), and the various predicted information is The main controller 110 notifies the voice lamp controller 113 by a prize information command.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the winning information command is received, various information notified by the winning information command (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is changed to the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) in the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). To be done. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol reservation sphere number counter 223b, like the special symbol reservation sphere counter 203c of the main controller 110, is a variable effect (variation display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effect pending in the main controller 110 up to a maximum of four times.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the holding number of holding balls is managed by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b. Is becoming

  Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first ball inlet 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main controller 110. When the number of holding balls is subtracted, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c of the main control device 110 is acquired from the holding ball number command, The number is stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1808 in FIG. 31). In this way, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is updated according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is used to display the holding ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b after storing. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of, the display holding ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  In the display control device 114, when receiving the display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball number for the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol holding sphere number counter 223b is changed in value in synchronization with the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere numbers displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved sphere counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1802 in FIG. 31), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 32). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1702) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1805 in FIG. 31), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1907 in FIG. 32). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is set based on the stop type (the big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command, and the set stop type is displayed. The stop control command notifies the display controller 114.

  In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display of the variable effect is controlled.

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 31) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (fluctuation) (Production) is controlled.

  The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. From the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 13 to 28. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started regularly (in this embodiment, at an interval of 2 msec). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a regular process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first random type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 299, 99, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, as a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 and the like is executed (S104), and then The starting winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) into the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19.

  After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for displaying in the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S106), and the through-gate passage accompanying the passage of the ball in the second entrance 67 is performed. The process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21. After the through-gate passage processing is executed, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and other processing that should be executed periodically is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a and that the hit switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated, and the ball is fired. Is a process for determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device. This is processing for controlling the variable display of the third symbol and the like performed at 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is now determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As during the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the big hit of the special symbol (including the big hit game of the special symbol), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  If the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c (holding number N of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205), and changed by calculation. A reserved sphere number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved sphere number counter 203c is set (S206). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 24) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

  After setting the reserved ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After the data is shifted, a jackpot determination process is performed to perform a lottery to determine whether or not a special symbol is a jackpot based on the data shifted to the execution area (S208). The jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. Yes (S209). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time If has not elapsed (S209: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The stop symbol is set in advance by a jackpot setting process (S308) described later with reference to FIG. 16 or an outlier setting process (S309) described later with reference to FIG.

  After the processing of S210 is finished, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot of the special symbol (S211: Yes), the jackpot start corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S212).

  In the processing of S211, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving state counter stored in the various set value storage area 203e is 1 or more (S213). If the value of the time saving state counter is 1 or more (S213: Yes), the value of the time saving medium state counter is decremented by 1 (S214), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving state counter is 0 (S213: No), the process of S214 is skipped and this process ends.

  Next, the jackpot determination processing (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the big hit determination process (S208). This jackpot determination process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 14) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and is stored in the execution area of the special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a. Based on the value of the various counters, the lottery of "special symbol big hit" or "out of special symbol" (judgment) is performed, and fluctuations performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. It is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the effect.

  In the jackpot determination process, first, from the first hit random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202, select the first hit random number table 202a2 (not shown) for low probability, and determine whether it is a special symbol big hit or not. (S301). After that, the probability variation state flag stored in the various set value storage areas 203e is read (S302), and it is determined whether or not the probability variation state flag indicates a high probability state of the special symbol (S303).

  As a result of the process of S303, when it is determined that the special symbol is in the high probability state (S303: Yes), the first per random number table 202a1 stored in the ROM 202 is used for the high probability first per random number table 202a1. (Not shown) is read, as a table for determining whether or not a special symbol is a big hit, it is newly set instead of the first random number table 202a2 for low probability (S304), and the process proceeds to S305. To do. On the other hand, as a result of the process of S303, when it is determined that the special symbol is not in the high-probability state (that is, the special symbol is in the low-probability state) (S303: No), the process of S304 is skipped and the process proceeds to S305. To do.

In the process of S305, the value of the first random number counter C1 is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 203 (S305), the read value of the first random number counter C1 and S
301 or a table (comparison source table) for determining whether or not the special symbol set in the processing of S304 is a big hit (S306).

  As described above, in the first random number table 202a1 (not shown) for high probability, as a random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol, “4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78 , 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 ”are set. In the low-probability first random number table 202a2 (not shown), three random numbers "7, 107, 282" are set as the random numbers that are special jackpots. In the process of S306, the random number values defined in the table set as the comparison source table among these tables and the value of the first random number counter C1 are compared one by one.

  Based on this comparison, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 matches any random number value defined in the comparison source table (S307), and the matching random number value. If there is (that is, in the case of a big hit of the special symbol), the big hit time setting process for setting the mode of the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit and the control during the big hit are executed (S308), and the process proceeds to S310. To do. On the other hand, when there is no matching random number value in the process of S307 (that is, when the special symbol is out), the out-of-phase setting process for setting the mode of the variation pattern at the time of out-of-step is executed (S309), The process proceeds to S310. Details of the jackpot setting process (S308) and the out-of-range setting process (S309) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18.

  Next, in the process of S310, various counter values stored in the counter buffer are cleared (S310), and this process ends. Since various counter values are cleared in the process of S310, even in the case of a big hit, it is possible to clear the random number value (counter value) to be a big hit before the big hit state is started. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally obtain a random number value that is a jackpot for a special symbol from outside, analyze the timing when the random number value that is a jackpot appears, and assign the jackpot based on the analyzed timing. Can be suppressed. Specifically, the analyzed timing is set on a so-called hanging board, a random number is acquired at the timing when a random number value that is a big hit appears, and the fraudulent act of controlling to determine whether the big hit is hit is suppressed. You can In the present embodiment, various counter values stored in the counter buffer are cleared in the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 15), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot state for the player is set. You should clear it before you realize that it will be. Therefore, for example, the process of clearing the counter buffer may be executed during the variation effect, before the stop of the symbol, or the like.

  In this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the special symbol is in the high probability state, the process of S301 is configured to once set the first random number table for low probability time, which is early. This is to set a table for comparison. That is, when any first random number table (the first random number table 202a1 for high probability or the first random number table 202a2 for low probability) is not set, the influence of noise or the like Even if there occurs a problem that the processes of S303 and S304, which are intermediate processes, are skipped due to the big hit, based on the first winning random number table 202a2 for low probability set at the beginning of the big hit determination processing, Whether it is right or wrong can be determined.

  Next, the jackpot setting process (S308) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the jackpot time setting process is a process for setting the mode of the variation pattern during the jackpot and the control during the jackpot.

  In this process, first, the jackpot flag of the various set value storage areas 203e is set to ON (S401), and then the value of the first hit type counter C2 is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and the jackpot of the jackpot that has been won this time. The type is specified (S402). Specifically, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 is specified based on the first jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 6B). For example, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "80", the counter value is within the range of "70" to "97", and thus the jackpot type of this time is specified as the special jackpot B. Further, for example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "140", the counter value is within the range of "130" to "145", and thus the jackpot type of this time is specified as the probability variation jackpot F.

  Next, the set value corresponding to the specified jackpot type is read from the game result setting table 202e of the ROM 202, and the read set value is set in the corresponding storage area of the various set value storage areas 203e of the RAM 203 (S403). The process proceeds to S404. Here, as the setting value to be read from the game result setting table 202e and set in the various setting value storage area 203e, the lighting pattern of the LED 37a (the number of display symbols), information indicating the stop symbol of the special symbol (stop symbol code), , Information for specifying a table for selecting the mode of the fluctuation pattern from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (table selection information), and a control pattern for the special winning opening (large opening) 65a (large opening pattern) Etc.

  As described above, when the setting value data is read from the ROM 202 and set in the RAM 203, first, the transfer source address data and the setting destination address data are stored in one of the general-purpose registers of the register 210. Store temporarily. Then, the setting value data read from the ROM 202 based on the stored data of the transfer source address is temporarily stored in one of the general purpose registers in which the address data is not stored, and then the setting destination address is stored. The setting value is transferred (set) to the address of the RAM 203 indicated by the data. In the process of S403, the transfer control via the register 210 is repeated by the number of set value data to be transferred.

  In the process of S402, the jackpot type is specified from the random number value (counter value), and in the process of S403, various set values are determined based on the identified jackpot type. However, the range of the random number value (counter value) And various setting values may be directly associated and defined. That is, a table defining the range of random number values (counter values) and corresponding various setting values may be provided in the ROM 202, and the setting value may be directly specified from the random number value by referring to this table. .

  In the process of S404, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and compared with the table specified based on the table selection information to select the mode of the fluctuation pattern (S404). Then, the variation pattern command based on the selected variation pattern mode is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S405). The fluctuation pattern command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 24) described later that is executed by the MPU 201.

  After setting the variation pattern, a game result setting acquisition process, which is a process for acquiring and setting offset information that is information for setting the gaming state after the jackpot is finished, is executed at the end of the jackpot (S406), This process ends.

  Subsequently, the game result setting acquisition process (S406) will be described with reference to FIG. The game result setting acquisition process (S406) is a process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, and is a process for holding an offset value based on the lottery result of the special symbol in the RAM 203.

  In the game result setting acquisition process (S406), first, the value of offset 1 based on the present jackpot type is read from the game result setting table 202e and set as an offset value (S501). The term "set as an offset value" here means that the value of offset 1 or offset 2 read from the game result setting table 202e of the ROM 202 is temporarily stored in the accumulator 210a. Further, in the processing of S501, the value of the offset 1 is stored in the accumulator 210a without being stored in any of the general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2. This is because arithmetic processing is performed on the value.

  Similarly, the value of offset 2 based on the jackpot type of this time is read from the game result setting table 202e and stored in one of the general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2 (S502). After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour-shortening state counter is 0 (that is, whether or not the jackpot this time is the one that was won during the hour-shortening state of the ordinary symbol that is given after winning the various hour-and-hour jackpots). (S503).

  In the processing of S503, when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter is not 0 (S503: No), the value of offset 2 stored in any of the general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2 is stored in the accumulator 210a. The existing data is overwritten (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S503 that the value of the time saving state counter is 0 (S503: Yes), the process of S504 is skipped and the process proceeds to S505.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, depending on whether or not to win during the time saving state of the ordinary symbols given after various time saving / hits, the jackpot type (special jackpot A, special jackpot B) that shifts to a different game state after the jackpot ends. ) Is provided. Specifically, if the special jackpot A or the special jackpot B is won during the time saving state of the ordinary symbol that is given after various time saving jackpots, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot. On the other hand, if the special jackpot A or the special jackpot B is won in any other state, the special symbol shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot and shifts to the normal symbol time saving state. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the offset 1 or the offset 2 is defined in association with each of the two game states that can be transferred after the jackpot is over.

  In the process of S505, it is determined whether or not there is a high probability state of the special symbol (S505), and when it is determined that the high probability state of the special symbol (S505: Yes), the offset stored in the accumulator 210a. An arithmetic process is performed to switch the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits of the value (S506), and the process proceeds to S507. On the other hand, in the process of S505, when it is determined that the special symbol is not in the high-probability state (that is, the special symbol is in the low-probability state) (S505: No), the process of S506 is skipped and the process proceeds to S507. To do.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a jackpot type (hour-short jackpot A) in which the number of times of saving and shortening of a normal symbol given after the jackpot is different is provided depending on whether or not to win during a high probability state of a special symbol. Specifically, when the short-time jackpot A is won during the high-probability state of the special symbol, the normal symbol time-saving state is set from the end of the big hit until the special symbol is drawn 30 times. If you win the short-time jackpot A during the low probability state of the special symbol, the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set only after the jackpot is completed and until the special symbol is drawn 20 times. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the upper 4 bits or the lower 4 bits of the offset value are defined in association with each of the two game states that can be transferred after the jackpot is over.

  In the processing of S507, the lower 4 bits of the offset value stored in the accumulator 210a are extracted and stored in the offset value storage area of the various set value storage areas 203e provided in the RAM 203 (S507), and this processing is executed. finish. Here, “extracting the lower 4 bits” means taking the logical product of the data stored in the accumulator 210a and “0FH”. Regardless of the value of the upper 4 bits of the data stored in the accumulator 210a, the upper 4 bits are "0H" (that is, "0000B" by performing a logical product with "0FH" (that is, "000011111B"). )), Only the lower 4 bits of the data stored in the accumulator 210a remain.

  The offset value stored in the offset value storage area of the various setting value storage area 203e in the process of S507 is held until the jackpot end timing, and is a process for setting a state after the jackpot end process (FIG. 26). ), The data to be read from the state setting table 202f is determined.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a random number value (counter value) acquired with the entry into the first entry slot 64 (start prize) is converted into an offset value and stored in the offset value storage area. Since it is configured to set the gaming state after the jackpot is finished based on the offset value, it is possible to limit the period in which the random number value which is the jackpot of the special symbol is held for a short period. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally obtain a random number value that is a jackpot for a special symbol from outside, analyze the timing when the random number value that is a jackpot appears, and assign the jackpot based on the analyzed timing. Can be suppressed. Specifically, the analyzed timing is set on a so-called hanging board, a random number is acquired at the timing when a random number value that is a big hit appears, and the fraudulent act of controlling to determine whether the big hit is hit is suppressed. You can

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various setting values to be set in the addresses F091H to F094H as the gaming state after the jackpot is finished (the special symbol lottery state, the ordinary symbol state, the number of time reductions, and the variation pattern selection table switching). Since the number of times) is not specified and held in advance before the jackpot game is started, only the offset value, which is a value indicating the storage position of various setting values in the state setting table 202f, is held. The RAM 203 only needs to be provided with a storage area of 1 byte for the offset value storage area. Therefore, the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of offset 1 is stored in the accumulator 210a in the process of S501, and the value of offset 2 is stored in any of the general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2 in the process of S502. However, the value of offset 1 and the value of offset 2 are stored in either pair register (general-purpose register 210b1 and general-purpose register 210b2, general-purpose register 210c1 and general-purpose register 210c2, or general-purpose register 210d1 and general-purpose register 210d2). It may be stored in a batch. Then, if it is determined in the processing of S503 that the time saving state counter is 0 (S503: Yes), the value of offset 1 stored in the pair register may be stored in the accumulator 210a.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the offset 2 is temporarily stored in one of the general-purpose registers before the value of the time saving state counter is determined to be 0. When it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter is not 0 (S503: No), the value of the offset 2 may be stored. As a result, when the time saving state counter is 0 (S503: Yes), not only the processing of S504 but also the processing corresponding to the processing of S502 can be omitted, so that the processing load can be reduced. .

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of offset 2 stored in one of the general-purpose registers is not erased by the processing of S502, but it is stored in the general-purpose register before the processing of S505, for example. The offset 2 value may be deleted. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning by mistakenly referring to the general-purpose register in which the value of the offset 2 is stored in another process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, in the jackpot determination process (S208), the out-of-range setting process (S309) executed when the current lottery result is determined to be out of the special symbol will be described.

  In the out-of-range setting process, first, a table used for determining the variation pattern is specified (S501). Specifically, one of the plurality of tables defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d is identified by referring to the state of the time saving state flag in the various set value storage area 203e and the counter value of the variation selection state counter. To do. As described above, if the counter value of the variation selection state counter is not 0, a dedicated table is selected after the jackpot. On the other hand, if the counter value of the fluctuation selection state counter is 0, the table corresponding to the state of the time saving state flag is selected.

  After the processing of S501 is finished, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 203 (S502), and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern is calculated based on the read value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the table selected in the processing of S501. A mode is selected (S503). Then, the variation pattern command based on the selected variation pattern mode is set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S504), and this processing ends. The fluctuation pattern command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 24) described later that is executed by the MPU 201.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 19, the start winning processing (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), determines whether or not there is a winning (starting prize) in the first ball entrance 64, and if there is a starting prize. Is a process for executing a process for holding the value indicated by each random number counter.

  When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S601). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S601: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (holding number N of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S602). It is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol holding sphere number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S603).

  Whether there is no prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c must be less than 4. If (S603: No), this process is terminated and returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first ball entrance 64 (S601: Yes), and the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the special symbol holding ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S605).

  The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the reserved ball number command, extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. ..

  After the number of reserved balls command is set by the process of S605, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated by the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are set. , Is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S606). In the process of S606, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Then, based on the various counter values stored in the process of S606, the winning / non-winning of the lottery in the special symbol (whether or not it is a jackpot), its stop type (a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot), and its variation pattern are predicted. Yes (S607). Here, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is one of the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the processing of S606 and the random number value (hit value) stored in the first random number table 202a. It is determined by comparing one. As described above, the random number value that is a big hit for the special symbol at the time of high probability of the special symbol is stored in the first random number table 202a1 for high probability, "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52. , 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 ". The random number value which is 30 and is a big hit of the special symbol at the time of low probability of the special symbol is stored in the first random number table 202a2 for low probability, and is three of "7, 107, 282". ..

  Further, whether the current is the low probability state of the special symbol or the high probability state of the special symbol is determined by referring to the probability change state flag stored in the various set value storage area 203e. Specifically, if the probability variation state flag is on, it is a high probability state of the special symbol, and if the probability variation state flag is off, it is a low probability state of the special symbol. In the process of S607, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value stored in the first random number table 202a corresponding to the state of the probability variation state flag, and if these values match, a special Judged as a jackpot for the design.

  When it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the process of S606 and the random number value stored in the special symbol big hit type table are compared, Of the 13 types of special symbol jackpots (normal jackpot, short-time jackpot A, hour-short jackpot B, special jackpot A, special jackpot B, probability variation jackpot A to probability variation jackpot H), which jackpot category is determined. As described above, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 is identified by referring to the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 6B).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment, based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the process of S606, as the stop type displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the front / rear detachment reach is performed. It is determined whether it is a reach, a reach other than the front / back deviation, or a complete deviation. Here, if the probability variation state flag is on, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the process of S606 is compared with the random number value stored in the high probability probability stop type selection table, Determine the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", it is determined to be a complete deviation, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", it is determined to be a reach other than the front / rear deviation. However, if it is “98, 99”, it is determined that the reach is out of front and rear. On the other hand, if the probability variation flag 203e is off, the stop type is determined by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", it is determined to be out of alignment, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", it is determined to be reach other than out of front / back. However, if it is “98, 99”, it is determined that the reach is out of front and rear.

  Next, the variation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. The variation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is a variation pattern selection table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202, and a predicted lottery result and a predicted stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big hit). It is selected according to. In the fluctuation pattern table, for example, as fluctuation patterns for disconnection, "disconnection (for long time)", "disconnection (for short time)", "disconnection normal reach", "disconnection super reach", "disconnection special reach", etc. “Various normal reach” types, “hit super reach” types, “hit special reach” types are defined as variation patterns for big hits, and “shared normal reach” types , "Shared super reach" and "shared special reach" are stipulated. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, a fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

  By the processing of S607, whether or not the lottery in the special symbol, the stop type (the big hit type in the case of a big hit), and the variation pattern are predicted, then, whether or not the predicted lottery is won and the predicted stop type, The prize information command including the predicted variation pattern is set (S608), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13).

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 20, a normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83, and is associated with the first entrance 64. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S701). As the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hitting, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory which accompanies the first entrance 64 is made while the indication indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. In the middle of being. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S701: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S701: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702), and the second symbol display device. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S702: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S704), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S704: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d is not 0 (S704: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203d (S705).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S706). In the process of S706, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area → execution area, the holding second area → holding first area, the holding third area → holding second area, the holding fourth area → holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203b is acquired (S707).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state of a normal symbol (S708). Specifically, if the value of the time saving state counter stored in the various set value storage areas 203e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or if the probability variation state flag is on, it is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is present. .

  In the process of S708, when it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S708: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S709). As during the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the big hit of the special symbol (including the big hit game of the special symbol), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S709: Yes), the process proceeds to S711. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to hit. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to make it win the specific winning opening 65a, so that the electric accessory attached to the first winning opening 64 is opened. This is to prevent the ball, which is about to win the specific winning opening 65a, from entering the first winning opening 64 as much as possible. Since the specific winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening 64 is prevented from entering the first winning opening 64 during the big hit of the special symbol. Many balls enter the ball entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, the number of reserved balls for the first ball inlet 64 becomes maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state.

  In the process of S709, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S709: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit, and since the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is acquired in the process of S707. Based on the value of the second per random number counter C4 and the random number per ordinary symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is won is acquired (S710). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", Usually it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 6C).

  In the process of S708, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, the normal state of the normal symbol) (S708: No), the process proceeds to S711. In the process of S711, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S707 and the low value. Based on the random symbol per ordinary symbol for probability, the lottery result of whether or not the ordinary symbol is hit is acquired (S711). Specifically, the value of the second per random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", Usually it is determined that the design is off (see FIG. 6C).

  Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S710 or S711, it is determined whether or not it is a normal symbol hit (S712), when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S712: Yes) , The display mode of winning is set (S713). In the process of S713, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “◯” is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state.

  Then, it is determined whether or not it is the time saving state of the normal symbol (S714), and if it is determined as the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S714: Yes), whether or not the special symbol is currently a big hit. Is determined (S715). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is a big hit (S715: Yes), the process proceeds to S717. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to prevent the ball from entering the first ball entrance 64 as much as possible, even if it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as the case of the deviation of the ordinary symbol. The number of times the electric accessory is opened and the opening time are set.

  In the process of S715, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S715: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, so the first entrance The opening period of the electric accessory accompanying 64 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S716), and the process proceeds to S719. In the process of S714, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, the normal state of the normal symbol) (S714: No), the process proceeds to S717. In the process of S717, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is 0. .. is set to 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S717), and the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S712, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S712: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S718). In the process of S718, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be lit up as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S719.

  In the process of S719, it is determined whether or not it is a time saving state of the normal symbol (S719), and when it is determined that it is a time saving state of the normal symbol (S719: Yes), the variable display of the second symbol display device 83 The fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S720), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (that is, the normal state of the normal symbol) (S719: No), the variation time of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds ( S721), and this processing ends. In this way, except when the special symbol big hit, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", further, The opening period of the first entrance 64 is extremely long, which is “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, so that the ball easily enters the first entrance 64.

  In the process of S702, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Yes (S722). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S720 or the process of S721 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the processing of S722, if the variation time has not elapsed (S722: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S722, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S722: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S723). In the process of S723, the lottery for the normal symbols is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S713, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit up) on the second symbol display device 83. Display) is set. On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbols is missed and the display mode is set by the process of S718, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set. By the process of S723, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S1107) of the main process (see FIG. 24) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The display is set to end in the processing of S713 or the processing of S718, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device 83.

  Next, when the variable display being executed is started in the second symbol display device 83, the lottery result of the normal symbol (this time lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the hit of the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S724). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S724: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is set (S725), and this processing is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the processing of S725, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing processing (see S1105) of the main processing (see FIG. 24) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S724, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S724: No), the process of S725 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 13), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, and if the ball has passed, This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through-gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S801). Here, the passage of a ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S801: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S802). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S803).

  Whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (S801: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (S803: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, the ball passes through the second entrance 67 (S801: Yes), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S803: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S804). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. This area is stored in the area (S805), and this processing ends. In the process of S805, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S901), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

  Note that the NMI interrupt process described above is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup processing is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1001). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Next, a wait process (1 second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable. (S1002). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1003).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1004), and if it is turned on (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1012. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005), and if it is not stored (S1005: No). Since there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, the process proceeds to S1012 also in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1005: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1006), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1007: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, the process proceeds to S912. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the process of S1114 of FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1012, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1012). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1013, S1014) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S1013, S1014) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S1013, S1014), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1013), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1014). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S1010.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1004: No), the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored (S1005: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S1007: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S1008). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S1009), and the process proceeds to S1010. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 can start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1010, the production permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various productions. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S1011), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1101 to S1107 is executed as a regular process of 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating process of S1110 and S1111 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 13), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is output to each sub-side control device (peripheral). The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1101). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 13) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls acquired to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the reserved symbol number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 14) and the starting winning process (see FIG. 19) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 19) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1102). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1103), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1104). Here, the jackpot state of the special symbol, specifically, it is determined that the variation time of the variation pattern effect that is a jackpot has elapsed, after the start of the jackpot is set, the end of the set jackpot Refers to the period until setting. In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have been won in the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1104) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is executed (S1105). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S725 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 20), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S716 or the processing of S717 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1106). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S405 of the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 16) or the process of S504 of the out-of-range setting process (see FIG. 17), the variation pattern The variable display according to is started on the first symbol display device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the variation time elapses after the variation is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED. If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, each time a main process is executed, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 so that the player can confirm the change of the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S405 of the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 16) or the process of S504 of the out-of-range setting process (see FIG. 17). When is ended, the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is ended, and the process of S404 of the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 16) or the out-of-range setting process (see FIG. 17) of S503. In the display mode set by the process of 1, the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the first symbol display device 37.

  Next, the second symbol display updating process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1107). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S720 or the process of S721 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 20), the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S723 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 20), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is ended, and in the display mode set by the process of S713 or the process of S718 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 20), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83. (Lit display).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108), and if the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1109). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1109: Yes), the process proceeds to S1101 and the above-described processes after S1101 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1109: No), the first time is reached during the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1110, S1111).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1110). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are respectively stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1102 (S1111).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1101 to S1107 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

  Further, in the process of S1108, if the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1108: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 22 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1112 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1112), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1113). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1114), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1115), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

  The processing of S1108 is at the timing of the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1101 to S1107, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1110 and S1111 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. It can be started from the process of S1101. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1101 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the power-off process, the stack pointer is By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1101 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control processing (S1104). This jackpot control processing (S1104) is executed in the main interrupt processing (see FIG. 24), when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and a specific winning prize. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1201). As during the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are showing the big hit of the special symbol (including the big hit game of the special symbol), and the special symbol is being displayed. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1201, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S1201: No), this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if the special symbol is a big hit (1201: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1202). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1202: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is opened (S1203), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1204). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The number-of-rounds command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp is used. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1201, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1201: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1205). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds or 0.5 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or when opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a When a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10) are won after the ball is opened, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S1205, if the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1205: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1206), and this processing ends. To do. On the other hand, when the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1205: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the big hit (S1207).

  In the process of S1207, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1207: Yes), the set value corresponding to the gaming state after the jackpot end is set and the set value for the jackpot is reset. The jackpot end process is executed (S1208), the gaming state after the jackpot is ended is set, and this process is ended. Although details will be described later, in the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 26), the jackpot flag is initialized (“00H” is set) together with the other setting values in jackpot. Therefore, even when the power of the gaming machine is suddenly turned off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, it is possible to prevent only the jackpot flag from being turned off and the other setting values from being set to the jackpot.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the final round of the big hit, after the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening mouth) 65a is established, the ending effect for notifying the player of the end of the big hit is set. It In the process of S1205, when it is determined that the ending timing of the set ending effect has been set (the effect time set for executing the ending effect has elapsed), it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot.

  The end timing of the jackpot is not necessarily limited to the end timing of the ending effect. For example, in the final round of jackpot, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (big opening) 65a is established, it may be configured to shift to the jackpot ending process (S1208) as the jackpot ending timing. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26 to FIG. 28, the jackpot end processing (S1208) executed in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 25) by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. As described above, this jackpot ending process (S1208) is a process for setting a setting value corresponding to the gaming state after the jackpot is over and resetting the setting value for jackpot.

  In the jackpot ending process (S1208), first, the state setting table 202f is read from the ROM 202 (S1301). As used herein, "read" means that the upper byte (1AH) and the lower byte (D4H) of the start address (1AD4H) of the state setting table 202f are used as address data for any pair of general-purpose registers (for example, general-purpose registers). 210b1 and general-purpose register 210b2).

  Next, in the game result set value acquisition process (see FIG. 17) executed before the big hit this time is started, it is stored in advance in the offset value storage area of the various set value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 11). The offset value is stored in the accumulator 210a. Since the upper byte (F0H) of the address in the various set value storage area 203e (see FIG. 11) is the value stored as fixed value data in the address holding register 210f, the offset value is read using the 1-byte read instruction. be able to. That is, the lower byte (95H) of the address in the offset value storage area is designated as the read source (transfer source) and the accumulator 210a is designated as the setting destination, and the 1-byte read instruction causes the offset value storage area to be the read source (transfer source). The stored offset value is read out and transferred to the accumulator 210a which is the setting destination.

  By using the 1-byte read instruction, it is not necessary to describe the upper byte (F0H) of the address of the offset value storage area in the control program, so the program capacity can be reduced.

  Next, a calculation process of multiplying the offset value stored in the accumulator 210a by 4 is performed (S1303). The value of 4 is the number of types of data defined in the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 8) as the setting value after the jackpot is over. That is, four kinds of set values of the special symbol lottery state, the state of the ordinary symbol, the time saving number, and the variation pattern selection mode switching number are defined in the state setting table 202f (see FIG. 8).

  As shown in parentheses in FIG. 8, in the state setting table 202f, from the side having a smaller address value, the special symbol lottery state corresponding to the offset value 00H, the state of the ordinary symbol, the number of time reductions, and the variation pattern selection mode switching number , Special symbol lottery state corresponding to offset 01H, state of normal symbol, time saving, number of times of changing pattern selection mode, ..., lottery state of special symbol corresponding to offset 07H, state of normal symbol, time saving number, The data is stored in the order of the number of times the variation pattern selection mode is switched. In other words, the set value corresponding to the offset value that is incremented by 1 is stored every time the address value increases by 4. Therefore, the value obtained by multiplying the offset value by 4 becomes the difference (offset) between the start address of the state setting table 202f and the storage address of the data corresponding to the current offset value. In the processing of S1303, the difference (offset) of the address with respect to the head address of this state setting table 202f is obtained.

  When the process of S1303 ends, the difference between the address value set in the pair of general-purpose registers (for example, the general-purpose register 210b1 and the general-purpose register 210b2) in the process of S1301 with respect to the start address of the state setting table 202f calculated in the process of S1302 (Offset) is added, and the added address is set as the address of the data transfer source (read source) (S1304).

  Next, the address where the probability variation state flag of the various set value storage area 203e is stored is set as the setting destination address (S1305), and the data stored in the transfer source address set in the processing of S1304 is set as the setting destination address. Is transferred (S1306).

  After that, it is determined whether or not all the four types of data defined in the state setting table 202f have been transferred to the various setting value storage areas 203e (S1307), and the transfer has not been completed (that is, the untransferred data type is If it is determined (exists) (S1307: No), 1 is added to the transfer source (read source) address, the data specified by the added address is read (S1308), and further 1 is set to the setting destination address. After the addition, the data read in the process of S1308 is stored in the address after the addition (S1309). Then, returning to the processing of S1307, it is determined again whether or not all the four types of data defined in the state setting table 202f have been transferred to the various set value storage areas 203e (S1307). That is, the processes of S1307 to S1309 are repeated until all four types of data defined in the state setting table 202f are transferred to the various setting value storage area 203e.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1307, when it is determined that all four types of data defined in the status setting table 202f have been transferred to the various set value storage area 203e (S1307: Yes), the various set value storage areas 203e are set. The state command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the set state is set (S1310), the process for clearing the jackpot setting value (S1311 to S1312) is executed, and the present process is terminated.

  In the process of clearing the jackpot setting value, the start address of the jackpot end-time setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A) of the ROM 202 is set as the data transfer source (read source) address (S1311), and the jackpot is being hit. The data setting process for resetting the data set for the control of step S1312 is executed (S1312), and 0 is set to the address where the setting value in the jackpot in the various setting value storage areas 203e is set. A zero setting process for initialization is executed (S1313).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the data setting process (S1312) performed in the jackpot end process (see FIG. 26) will be described. The data setting process (S1312) is a process for resetting the data set for the control during the big hit.

  In this data setting process (S1312), first, the address data specified by the transfer source (read source) address is read, and the address indicated by the address data is set as the setting destination address (S1401). Here, the transfer source (reading source) address is set to the head address of the jackpot end time setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A) in the process of S1311 of the jackpot termination process (see FIG. 26). Further, as shown in FIG. 9A, since the head address of the jackpot end setting table 202g stores the address data indicating the game state setting area in the various set value storage areas 203e, the game state thereof. The address indicating the setting area is set as the setting destination address.

  Next, in the process of S1401, it is determined whether or not the data read from the jackpot end time setting table 202g is "00H" (S1402). If the result of the determination is "00H" (S1402: Yes), this process Ends and shifts to zero setting processing (see FIG. 28). On the other hand, when it is determined that the data read from the jackpot end time setting table 202g is data other than “00H” in the process of S1401 (S1402: No), 1 is added to the transfer source (read source) address, The added address is set as a new transfer source (read source) address (S1403).

  Next, the data of the setting value stored in the transfer source address is read and stored in the setting destination address (S1404). The setting destination address is the address of the various setting value storage area 202e set in the process of S1401. When the storage of the data is completed, 1 is added again to the transfer source address to set a new transfer source address (S1405), and the process returns to S1401. Then, in the process of S1402, the processes of S1401 to S1405 are repeated until 00H is read as the address data, and when 00H is read as the address data (S1402: Yes), based on the jackpot end time setting table 202g. Since the reset process has been completed, the process ends.

  Next, the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 after the end of the data setting process (S1312) will be described with reference to FIG. The zero setting process (see FIG. 28) is a process of initializing by overwriting various setting values set for performing a big hit control in the various setting value storage area 203e with 0.

  In the zero setting process (see FIG. 28), first, 1 is added to the transfer source (read source) address to set a new transfer source (read source) address (S1501). The address set as the transfer source (read source) address before the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) is the end address of the jackpot end time setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A). The jackpot end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B) used in this process is defined in the ROM 202 after the address next to the last address of the jackpot end setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A). ing. Therefore, in the zero setting process (see FIG. 28), 1 is added to the setting destination address at the beginning of the process to set the setting destination address from the end of the jackpot end time setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A) to the jackpot. It is moved to the beginning of the end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, following the end address of the jackpot end time setting table 202g referred to in the data setting processing (see FIG. 27), the jackpot used in this processing (zero setting processing). The end clear table 202h is defined. For this reason, by adopting a configuration in which this process (zero setting process) is executed after the data setting process (see FIG. 27), in this process, the transfer source address is determined again from the ROM 202 at the start of the process and set. The transfer source address can be specified by simply adding 1 to the immediately preceding transfer source address without the necessity of reworking. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

  Note that, for example, when all the data set at each address of the various set value storage area 203e is “00H” at the end of the big hit, the data setting process (see FIG. 27) is omitted and the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) is performed. (Refer to FIG. 3) only. In this case, it is necessary to determine the transfer source address of the data at the start of the zero setting process, set the address immediately before the transfer source address to the transfer source address, and then shift to the process of S1501. In the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the process of S1501, the process of adding 1 to the transfer source address and setting it as a new transfer source address is executed. This is because an address deviating from the set address by 1 is set as the transfer source address.

  Next, the address data stored in the address set as the transfer source (read source) address in the jackpot completion clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B) is read, and is indicated by the read address data. The address of the RAM 203 is set as the setting destination address (S1502).

  After the processing of S1502, in the processing of S1502, it is determined whether or not the data read from the transfer source (read source) address is "00H" (S1503), and it is determined that the read data is "00H". If so (S1503: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the read data is not "00H" (S1503: No), "00H" is overwritten on the address of the RAM 203 set as the setting destination address (S1504), and the process returns to S1501.

  After that, the processing of S1501 to S1504 is repeated until "00H" is read from the jackpot clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B). In the jackpot end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B), "00H" is stored only in the end address, and "00H" is not stored in the addresses other than the end address. The processing of S1501 to S1504 is repeated until "00H" is stored in all the addresses corresponding to the address data specified in.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a condition for ending the zero setting process (see FIG. 28), the number of times of setting “00H” as data in the various set value storage area 203e of the RAM 203 is described in the control program. , "00H" is read out as data from the jackpot end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B) without the configuration of terminating the processing when it is determined that the data setting for the set number of times is completed. It is configured to end the process when it is determined that it is.

  When the set number of times is described in the control program, the control program designer newly counts the number of set values each time the number of set values changes due to circumstances such as diversion of the program to another model. It is necessary to rewrite the control program according to the counted number. Therefore, in addition to the time and effort required to count the set values, if the designer makes a mistake, the control program will specify an incorrect number of repetitions, so the settings at the end of the jackpot will be completed normally. It may not be possible to cause the pachinko machine 10 to malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is only necessary to define "00H" as data at the end of the jackpot end-time clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B). It can reduce the possibility that the designer sometimes makes a mistake. Therefore, the data setting at the end of the jackpot can be executed more reliably based on the control program, so that the malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

  Note that the termination condition of the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) is when “00H” is read as data, because the lower byte of the address in the various set value storage area 203e (see FIG. 11) The address where "00H" is (that is, the address "F000H") is an area for storing the set value related to the ball launch, and the set value is not changed before and after the big hit (initialization is required at the end of the big hit). This is because the address is not). Since the address does not need to be initialized at the end of the jackpot, it is not necessary to define it as an address to be initialized in the jackpot end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B), and the jackpot end clear table 202h ( There is no possibility of appearing other than at the end of (see FIG. 9B). Therefore, it is possible to prevent "00H" from being read as data before the initialization of all the set values is completed, and the processing from ending.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 32. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

  First, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1601). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-on processing of S1716 (see FIG. 30) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous interruption”) in the current startup processing. It is determined whether or not it was started during the execution of () (S1602). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1713 of FIG. 30), the power-off process of S1716 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process of S1716 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1602: No), the current startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred, and the power-off in S1716 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1603).

  The confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1606. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not “55AAh”, it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1603: Yes), the process proceeds to S1604 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1603: No), the process proceeds to S1608.

  If the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to power shutdown). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1603: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1604. On the other hand, the startup process of this time is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process of S1716 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1603: No), and the process proceeds to S1608.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1602: Yes), the startup processing of this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S1716, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, and therefore the process proceeds to S1604, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the processing of S1604, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1604). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, and it is confirmed whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1606). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read / write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1605: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1607), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You can

  In the process of S1608, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1608). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1716 is executed (see S1715 in FIG. 30). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1716 is executed, the process of S1608 with the power-off flag turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and the processing is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S1716 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1608: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1609), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1610), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1611), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1608 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current startup process is started after the power has been completely cut off, for example, and therefore the process of S1604 to S1606 is performed. This is the case where the processing has been started, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) and started due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1608: No), S1609 which is a work area clearing process of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1610, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1610), and then the interrupt permission is set. Then (S1611), the process proceeds to the main process.

  It should be noted that the clear processing of S1609 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1604 when the processing of S1608 is reached through the processing of S1604 to S1606. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is reset by and the start-up process is started, the control of the voice lamp control unit 113 is continued by saving the data in the work area of the RAM 223 without clearing it. Because you can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or after the process of S1701 this time has been executed (S1701), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1701: No), the process proceeds to S1711 without performing the processes of S1702 to S1710. In the processing of S1701, it is the processing relating to the display (effect) that mainly determines whether 1 ms has elapsed in S1702 to S1710, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). , It is preferable to execute the command determination processing of S1711 and the variable display setting processing of S1712 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1711 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1712 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to make the setting related to the variation effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has passed in the process of S1701 (S1701: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1703 to S1712 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1702). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1708 described later (S1703), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1704). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not being turned on, the process goes to S1705 without notifying by the power-on notifying process.

  In the process of S1705, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the held quantity display updating process is executed (S1706). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen, and the setting is controlled as a command. Device 114. In the number-of-holds display updating process, a process of turning on a holding lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is performed.

  After that, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1707). In this frame button input monitoring / rendering process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the effect is monitored and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Further, when the frame effect 22 is pressed during the period in which the variation effect is not executed or during the high-speed variation period, the process of changing the stage is performed, and the back image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear surface image corresponding to the changed stage in the rear surface image change command, the display control device 114 causes the rear surface image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to be an image corresponding to the stage. The process of changing to. In addition, when the preliminary announcement character appears at the start of variable display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this change, or by pressing the frame button 22 during the reach effect, the expectation for the jackpot is displayed. It is also possible to change to a holding effect or to use the frame button 22 as an enter button for selecting one reach effect from a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1707 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S1708), and then the sound edit / output process is executed (S1709). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1709, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1710), and the process proceeds to S1711. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S1708 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound edit / output process of S1709 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1711, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1711). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1711). In the variable display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the variable display setting process (S1712) is completed, it is determined whether or not the power RAM occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1713). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1713 (S1713: Yes), the power-off flag and the power-off process in-progress flag are both turned on (S1715), and the power-off process is executed (S1716). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1717), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the information about the occurrence of power failure is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1713 (S1713: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1714), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1714: No), the process returns to S1701 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1714: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, and thus can call the clerk of the hall or the like to request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, the command determination processing (S1711) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1711). The command determination process (S1711) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 30) performed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the command received from the main control device 110 is determined. .. In addition, in this process, when the number-of-holding-balls command is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

  In the command determination process, first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not (S1801). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1801: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1802), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S1803). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 32) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1801: No), then it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1804). When the stop type command is received (S1804: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1805), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1806), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 32) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1804: No), then it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1807). When the number of reserved balls command is received (S1807: Yes), the value included in the received number of reserved balls command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (special symbol The variable display hold count N) is extracted and stored in the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1808). In the process of S1808, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b is set. After the processing of S1808 ends, the processing returns to the main processing.

  Here, since the number of reserved balls command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize) or when the special symbol lottery is performed, the start prize. Each time is detected, or each time a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed by the process of S1808 to the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, at the time of detection of the start winning or special At the time of lottery of symbols, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the process of S1808 is executed, the display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1807, if the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S1807: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1809). Then, when the winning information command is received (S1809: Yes), various information (whether winning, stopping type, variation pattern) is extracted from the received winning information command as winning information (S1809). After the processing of S1809 ends, next, the winning information (winning / non-hit, stop type, variation pattern) extracted in the processing of S1809 is the first in the empty areas (first area to fourth area) of the winning information storage area 223a. Store in area (S1810),
Return to main processing.

  In the process of S1809, when the winning information command is not received (S1809: No), it is then determined whether or not the round number command is received from the main control device 110 (S1812). When the round number command is received (S1812: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1813), and the display round number command is set according to the extracted round number ( (S1814), the present process ends. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1702) of the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1812, when the round number command is not received (S1812: No), it is determined whether or not another command is received, and the process according to the received command is executed ( S1819), and returns to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed controlled. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1712). This variable display setting process (S1712) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1901). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1901: No), it means that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and thus the processing of S1906 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is on (S1901: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S1902), and then, in the processing of S1803 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 31), the variation pattern The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1903).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1904). In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1905). In the process of S1905, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1906.

  In the process of S1906, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1906). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1906: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110. The setting process ends and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1906: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1907), and then in the process of S1806 of the command determination process (see FIG. 31), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1908).

  Next, the stop type designated by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1909), and the display control device is set based on the set stop type. A display stop type command for notifying 114 is generated, the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1910), and this processing ends. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display of the variable effect is controlled.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 determines that the "special symbol big hit", the variation effect corresponding to the "special symbol big hit", and after the end of the variation effect The set value of the jackpot state (special game state) is set in each set value storage area 203e of the RAM 203, and the offset value for selecting the state after the jackpot is finished from the state setting table 202f is stored in the RAM 203. It is configured. At the end timing of the jackpot, based on the offset value stored in the RAM 203 in advance, the set value corresponding to the state after the jackpot is read from the state setting table 202f and set in the various set value storage area 203e. Is configured to.

  The gaming state after the jackpot is determined based on a random number value that is acquired in association with a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), but in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game state is acquired. Hold the random number value obtained until the jackpot end timing, and do not use it to identify the gaming state after the jackpot, convert the obtained random number value into an offset value and hold it, It is configured to set the game state after the jackpot is over based on the offset value.

  Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally obtain a random number value that is a jackpot for a special symbol from outside, analyze the timing when the random number value that is a jackpot appears, and assign the jackpot based on the analyzed timing. Can be suppressed. Specifically, the analyzed timing is set on a so-called hanging board, a random number is acquired at the timing when a random number value that is a big hit appears, and the fraudulent act of controlling to determine whether the big hit is hit is suppressed. You can

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various setting values to be set in the various setting value storage area 203e as the game state after the jackpot is over (the special symbol lottery state, the ordinary symbol state, the number of hours saved, the variation pattern selection table). The number of times of switching) is not specified and held in advance before the jackpot game is started, but only the offset value, which is a value indicating the storage position of various setting values in the state setting table 202f, is held. Therefore, it suffices to provide only a storage area for the offset value storage area of 1 byte in the RAM 203. Therefore, the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a zero setting process (see FIG. 28) that is a process of initializing the setting value for the big hit at the end timing of the big hit is executed. In this zero setting process (see FIG. 28), “00H” is sequentially set as data to a plurality of addresses defined in the jackpot end-time clear table 202h of the ROM 202. That is, in the jackpot end clear table 202h, only the setting destination address for initializing the setting is defined, and the control of writing "00H" is described on the control program side.

  When the jackpot end clear table 202h is configured to prescribe the setting destination address of each setting value storage area 203e and the setting data (that is, 00H) for setting the setting destination address, the jackpot end clearing table There is a problem that the data amount of 202h increases. On the other hand, like the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if only the setting destination address is defined in the big hit end clear table 202h, the data amount of the big hit end clear table 202h can be reduced. The capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a condition for ending the zero setting process (see FIG. 28), the number of times of setting data in the various set value storage areas 203e is described in the control program, and the number of times of setting is set. The processing is not terminated when it is determined that the data setting has been completed, but the processing is terminated when it is determined that "00H" is read out as data from the jackpot end clear table 202h. is doing.

  When the set number of times is described in the control program, the control program designer newly counts the number of set values each time the number of set values changes due to circumstances such as diversion of the program to another model. It is necessary to rewrite the control program according to the counted number. Therefore, in addition to the time and effort required to count the set values, if the designer makes a mistake, the control program will specify an incorrect number of repetitions, so the settings at the end of the jackpot will be completed normally. It may not be possible to cause the pachinko machine 10 to malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is only necessary to define "00H" as data at the end of the jackpot end time setting table 202g and the jackpot end clear table 202h, and therefore, when designing the control program. The possibility that the designer makes a mistake can be reduced. Therefore, the data setting at the end of the jackpot can be executed more reliably based on the control program, so that the malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the jackpot end setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A) and the jackpot end clear table 202h in the data setting process (see FIG. 27) and the zero setting process (see FIG. 28). Although each processing is terminated when "00H" is read as data from (see FIG. 9B), the termination condition of each processing is not limited to this. For example, when "FFH" is read as data from the jackpot end setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A) or the jackpot end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B), each process is terminated. May be.

  Further, the ending conditions of the data setting process (see FIG. 27) and the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) may be different. For example, when "00H" is read as data from the jackpot end setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A), the data setting process (see FIG. 27) is ended, and the jackpot end clear table 202h (see FIG. 9). The zero setting process (see FIG. 28) may be configured to be terminated when “FFH” is read as data from (see (b)).

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with a process of continuing the control stipulated in the ROM 202 until "00H" is read only in the jackpot end process (FIG. 26). It is not limited. For example, the same process may be performed when setting at the start of fluctuation or setting at the end of fluctuation.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 16), in addition to the setting of the fluctuation pattern, the jackpot setting, the offset value, and the like are read from the game result setting table 202e. Although the process of transferring to the various set value storage area 203e is performed, the process is not limited to this. For example, in the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 16), only the variation pattern may be set, and the setting value and the offset value indicating the setting during jackpot may be set at the start of the jackpot.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 33. In the above-described first embodiment, two processes of a data setting process (see FIG. 27) and a zero setting process (see FIG. 28) are provided as a process for resetting the jackpot setting, and various processes are performed in each process. The set value of a predetermined address in the set value storage area 203e is reset.

  More specifically, the jackpot end time setting table 202g (see FIG. 9A) defined in the ROM 202 is processed by the data setting process (see FIG. 27) performed in the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 26). Based on this, the setting of the game state is reset, and by the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) executed subsequently to the data setting process (see FIG. 27), the jackpot end clear table 202h (defined in the ROM 202 is set. Based on FIG. 9B), the setting value of the address in the RAM 203 to which the setting of the big hit is set is cleared.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, a jackpot end setting / clear table 202i including information defined in the jackpot end setting table 202g and information defined in the jackpot end setting clear table 202h is provided. , The setting during jackpot is reset by the data setting process (see FIG. 27) based on the information defined in the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in structure is that the jackpot end setting table 202g provided in the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, and The jackpot end setting / clear table 202i is provided instead of the jackpot end clear table 202h. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33A is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. Similar to the first embodiment, the ROM 202 of the present embodiment has a first random number table 202a, a first hit type selection table 202b, a second hit random number table 202c, a variation pattern selection table 202d, and a game result setting. A table 202e and a state setting table 202f are provided. In addition to these, the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is provided with a jackpot end time setting / clear table 202i. That is, the ROM 202 of the present embodiment is provided with a jackpot end setting / clear table 202i in place of the jackpot end setting table 202g and the jackpot end clear table 202h provided in the first embodiment. .. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  The jackpot end setting / clear table 202i is a table that is referred to for resetting the setting value of the address to which the setting in the jackpot of the various setting value storage areas 203e is set at the jackpot ending timing. It is defined in the range of addresses "1202H" to "121EH". Details of the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 33B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the data defined in the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i. As shown in FIG. 33B, this jackpot end-time setting / clearing table 202i includes address data indicating an address (setting destination) whose setting value needs to be reset in various setting value storage areas 203e, The setting contents to be set at that address (setting destination) are defined alternately. As the address that needs to be reset, for example, an address (F030H) storing the setting of the maximum number of rounds, an address (F031H) of a winning number counter, etc. are defined.

  As described above, in the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i, the data defined in the jackpot end setting table 202g in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment and the data defined in the jackpot end clear table 202h. Both are specified. Here, only the information indicating the setting destination address is defined in the jackpot end clear table 202h, and the data “00H” to be stored in the setting destination address is not defined in the table and is set in the control program side. The control process for setting "00H" is described. On the other hand, in the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i, the setting values to be set in all the setting destination addresses are defined in the table. That is, all the data has the same data structure as the jackpot end time setting table 202g in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, two types of tables having different data configurations (a jackpot end setting table 202g in which both address data of a setting destination and data to be set in the setting destination are defined, and a setting) Since the setting change of the various set value storage areas 203e is performed by referring to the jackpot end clear table 202h) in which only the above address data is defined, the data setting process (see FIG. 27) and the zero setting are performed, respectively. It was necessary to provide two types of control processing called processing (see FIG. 28) and perform the processing separately. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, only one type of the jackpot end time setting / clear table 202i is provided, and the data arrangement is the same as that of the jackpot end time setting table 202g. Therefore, if only one type of data setting process (see FIG. 27) is prepared as the control process, all settings relating to the jackpot can be reset at the end of the jackpot.

<Regarding control processing in the second embodiment>
Hereinafter, it will be described with reference to FIG. 27 again that in the second embodiment, if only the data setting process (see FIG. 27) is provided, all the settings relating to the jackpot can be reset. As described above, FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the data setting process which is a process for resetting the setting value regarding the jackpot.

  In the data setting process (see FIG. 27), first, the address data defined in the transfer source address is read, and the address indicated by the read address data is set as the setting destination address (S1401). Here, in the first embodiment, the transfer source (read source) address is set to the head address of the jackpot end time setting table 202g before the data setting process is started (S1311 in FIG. 26). In the second embodiment, instead of this, the start address (1202H) of the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i (see FIG. 33B) is set as the transfer source (read source) address. Therefore, in the processing of S1401 performed after the start of the data setting processing (see FIG. 27), the address of the game state setting area defined in the start address of the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i (see FIG. 33 (b)) (F035H) is set as the setting destination address.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the data read as the setting destination address is "00H" (S1402), and if it is determined that the data is "00H" (S1402: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the read data is not "00H" (S1402: No), 1 is added to the transfer source (read source) address and the new transfer source (read source) address is set (S1403). ).

  In the processing of S1402 that is first performed after the start of the data setting processing (see FIG. 27), the address (F035H) of the game state setting area is read as the setting destination address, so the read data is not "00H". It is determined (S1402: No), and the address (1203H) obtained by adding 1 to the start address (1202H) of the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i (see FIG. 33B) is set as the transfer source address (S1403). ..

  After that, the setting value data stored in the transfer source address is set to the setting destination address (S1404), 1 is added to the transfer source address to set a new transfer source address (S1405), and the process returns to S1401. In the process of S1404 which is first performed after the start of the data setting process (see FIG. 27), the address “1203H” is set as the transfer source address, so the reset data stored in the transfer source address is read out. Set to the address (F035H) of the game state setting area (S1404), add 1 to the transfer source address "1203H" to set the transfer source address to "1204H" (S1405), and then to the processing of S1401. Return.

  After that, the setting destination address defined in the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i (see FIG. 33 (b)) is set to the setting destination defined in the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i (see FIG. 33 (b)). The process of writing the contents is repeated. The setting destination address defined in the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i (see FIG. 33B) sets the test signal setting address “F01DH”, “F01EH”, or the maximum number of rounds. Since an address other than “00H” such as “F030H” which is the address for this purpose is defined, it is determined that “00H” has been read by the processing of S1402 before resetting all the setting destinations, and the data is It is possible to prevent the setting process (see FIG. 27) from being terminated. After setting all the data, the transfer destination (read source) address is set to "00H" defined at the end of the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i (see FIG. 33B), The data setting process (see FIG. 27) is ended by the process of S1402.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as the condition for ending the data setting process (see FIG. 27), the number of times of setting data in the various set value storage areas 203e is described in the control program and set. If it is determined that "00H" has been read out as data from the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i, the processing is terminated without configuring to end the processing when it is determined that the data setting for the number of times has been completed. It is configured to let.

  When the set number of times is described in the control program, the control program designer newly counts the number of set values each time the number of set values changes due to circumstances such as diversion of the program to another model. It is necessary to rewrite the control program according to the counted number. Therefore, in addition to the time and effort required to count the set values, if the designer makes a mistake, the control program will specify an incorrect number of repetitions, so the settings at the end of the jackpot will be completed normally. It may not be possible to cause the pachinko machine 10 to malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is only necessary to define "00H" as data at the end of the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i jackpot end setting / clear table 202i. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the designer will make a mistake when designing. Therefore, the data setting at the end of the jackpot can be executed more reliably based on the control program, so that the malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, only one type of the jackpot end time setting / clear table 202i is provided, and the jackpot setting is reset by referring to the single table. Therefore, if only one type of data setting process (see FIG. 27) is prepared as the control process, all the settings relating to the jackpot can be reset at the end of the jackpot, so that the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment can be reset. It is possible to reduce the program capacity as compared with.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the data setting process (see FIG. 27), when “00H” is read out as data from the jackpot end time setting / clear table 202i (see FIG. 33 (b)), each of them will be described. Although the processing is configured to end, the termination condition of the data setting processing (see FIG. 27) is not limited to this. For example, the processing may be ended when “FFH” is read as data from the jackpot end setting / clear table 202i (see FIG. 33B).

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. In the first embodiment described above, in the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) for initializing the set value for performing the jackpot control, the jackpot end clear table (see FIG. 9B) is defined. The configuration is such that "00H" is set to all the set destination addresses. Therefore, if there is a set value having an initial value other than “00H”, it cannot be specified in the jackpot end-time clear table (see FIG. 9B), and another process is provided to initialize it. The values had to be set separately.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, a plurality of setting values having different initial values can be initialized by one process at the end of the jackpot. Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, among the set values that have been initialized based on the jackpot end-time clear table 202h (see FIG. 9B), the initial set value for the test signal is set. The value is "FFH". On the other hand, the set value of the maximum number of rounds and the initial value of the winning number counter and the like are configured to be “00H” like the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in configuration is that the jackpot end clear table 202h provided in the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is replaced. That is, the jackpot end initial value setting table 202j is provided. Further, some processing included in the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 differs from that of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp controller 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34A is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. Similar to the first embodiment, the ROM 202 of the present embodiment has a first random number table 202a, a first hit type selection table 202b, a second hit random number table 202c, a variation pattern selection table 202d, and a game result setting. A table 202e, a state setting table 202f, and a jackpot end time setting table 202g are provided. In addition to these, the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is provided with a jackpot end-time initial value setting table 202j. That is, the ROM 202 of this embodiment is provided with a jackpot end initial value setting table 202j in place of the jackpot end time clear table 202h provided in the first embodiment. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the jackpot end initial value setting table 202j will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot end initial value setting table 202j is a table stored in the range of addresses "1205H" to "1212H" of the ROM 202, and each address defines the addresses of various setting value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 11). Has been done. In the jackpot end initial value setting table 202j, "00H" is stored as data at addresses "1207H" and "1213H" of the ROM 202. The "00H" data is not data for designating an address, but data used for ending the repeating process for setting an initial value.

  Although details will be described later, in the zero setting process 2 (see FIG. 36), which is one process of the jackpot ending process, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 causes the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to sort the addresses of the ROM 202 from the jackpot ending initial value setting table 202j. The stored data is read, and either "00H" or "FFH" (initial value data) is set as a set value at the address indicated by the read stored data (address data).

  Whether "00H" or "FFH" is set as the initial value is determined by the data arrangement order. Specifically, "FFH" is set as an initial value to the address of the various set value storage area 203e indicated by the data stored at the address before the address "1207H" where "00H" is defined as the data. Set. On the other hand, "00H" is set as an initial value to the address of the various set value storage area 203e indicated by the data stored at the address after the address "1207H" where "00H" is defined as the data.

<Regarding Control Processing in Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 35 and FIG. 36, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. In the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 35), similarly to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a set value for determining the state after the jackpot is set is set in the various set value storage area 203e, and the jackpot control is performed. This is a process that is executed to reset the set value that was set to be performed.

  Of the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 35), in each process of S1301 to S1312, the same process as each of S1301 to S1312 of the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment is executed. Then, in the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 35) in the third embodiment, when the process of S1312 is completed, instead of the zero setting process (S1313) of the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment, zero setting is performed. The process 2 (S1321) is executed. The zero setting process 2 (S1321) is a process for resetting the set values set in the various set value storage areas 203e for performing the jackpot control to the initial values.

  Here, the details of the zero setting process 2 (S1321) will be described with reference to FIG. Of the zero setting process 2 (S1321), in each process of S1501 to S1503, the same process as each of S1501 to S1503 of the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment is executed. The description is omitted.

  When it is determined in the process of S1502 that the address data read from the transfer source (read source) address is not "00H" (S1503: No), various setting value storage areas designated as the setting destination address in the process of S1502. "FFH" is set as the initial value in the address of 203e (S1511), and the process returns to S1501. On the other hand, when it is determined that the address data read in the process of S1502 is “00H” (S1503: Yes), the process proceeds to S1512. That is, the processes of S1501 to S1503 and S1511 are repeated until “00H” is read as data from the jackpot end initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34B).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the initial value of the set value of the test signal is “FFH”. On the other hand, the initial value of the setting values other than the setting value of the test signal (the setting value of the maximum round number, the value of the winning number counter, etc.) is "00H". In order to collectively set these different initial values, the addresses for setting the test signals are defined in order from the head address of the jackpot end initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34B). Then, until the big hit end initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34 (b)) is read as "00H" as data, it is read from the big hit end initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34 (b)). The processing for setting "FFH" as an initial value in the data setting position (address) is looped, and when "00H" is read, the loop is terminated and the process proceeds to S1512.

  Next, in the process of S1512, 1 is added to the address of the jackpot end initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34B) set as the transfer source (read source) (S1512), and the address after the addition is added. The address data stored in the RAM 203 is read and set as a setting destination address for setting an initial value (S1513).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the address data read in the process of S1513 is "00H" (S1514), and if it is determined that the read data is "00H", this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the read data is not "00H" (S1514: No), "00H" is set to the address set as the setting destination (S1515), and the process returns to S1512. That is, unless "00H" is read as data from the jackpot end initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34 (b)), it is defined in the jackpot end initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34 (b)). "00H" is sequentially set to the existing addresses as an initial value. When "00H" is read as data from the jackpot end initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34 (b)), it means that the initial values have been set to all the setting destinations. The process ends.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as the setting items to be initialized at the end of the jackpot, in addition to the setting value having the initial value of “00H”, the setting value having the initial value of “FFH” is set. Also, it is configured so that initialization can be performed by a single process. Therefore, the degree of freedom in setting the initial value of each set value can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, the set value of the initial value "00H" and the set value of the initial value "FFH" are provided, but the initial value of each setting item is not limited to these values. , “0FH” may be set as the initial value, or “01H” may be set as the initial value.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the zero setting process 2 (see FIG. 36), when “00H” is read as data from the jackpot end initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34 (b)), It is configured so that the loop process of sequentially setting "FFH" as an initial value to each setting destination address defined in the jackpot end initial value setting table 202j (see FIG. 34B) is executed. The condition for exiting the process is not limited to this. The data that can be used as a condition for exiting the loop process may be any data that corresponds to the lower byte of the address where the setting is not likely to change when the game state is changed. For example, the addresses “F09CH” to “F0FFH” in the various set value storage areas 203e are unused work areas as described above. Therefore, since the set value is not rewritten due to the change of the game state or the like, the lower byte (for example, "AAH" or "BBH") of any of these addresses may be used as the end condition.

  Similarly, the data setting process (see FIG. 27) in the first and second embodiments, the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, and the zero setting process 2 in the third embodiment. The condition for ending (see FIG. 36) is not limited to the case where "00H" is read as the data, and the process may be ended when "AAH" or "BBH" is read, for example. You may comprise.

  Further, the initial values set in the zero setting process 2 (see FIG. 36) in the third embodiment are not limited to two types, and an arbitrary number of initial values may be provided.

  Further, the data setting processing (see FIG. 27) in the first and second embodiments, the zero setting processing (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, and the zero setting processing 2 (see FIG. 36) in the third embodiment. (See reference) is executed to initialize the jackpot setting when the jackpot is finished, but is not limited to this. For example, the time saving number of the normal symbol becomes 0, and when shifting to the normal state of the normal symbol, any of these processes may be used to erase the setting of the time saving state of the normal symbol.

  Further, the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) in the first embodiment, the data setting process (see FIG. 27) and the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) in the second embodiment, and the zero setting process in the third embodiment. In No. 2 (see FIG. 36), reading of data 1 and setting of data 1 are alternately performed. On the other hand, a plurality of data may be collectively read and the collectively read data may be collectively set.

  For example, in the zero setting process (see FIG. 28) of the first embodiment, the address data stored in the transfer source address is read and set as the setting destination address (see S1502 in FIG. 28), and the read address data is If the data is other than "00H" (S1503: No), the process may return to S1501 without shifting to the process of S1504.

  Specifically, every time a transfer source address is newly set by the processing of S1501, the address data stored in the transfer source address is stored in different general-purpose registers (general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2). Therefore, it is set to the setting destination address. For example, first, the data stored in the address set as the transfer source address by the process of S1501 is stored in the general-purpose register 210b1 and stored in the address newly set as the transfer source address by the process of S1501 performed next. The stored data may be stored in the general-purpose register 210b2, for example. Then, thereafter, each time the transfer source address is updated by the processing of S1501, the transfer source address may be sequentially stored in the general-purpose register 210c1, the general-purpose register 210c2, or the like.

  If it is determined that the read address data is "00H" in the process of S1503, "00H" is overwritten as data on all the addresses set as the setting destination addresses, and then the process ends. It may be configured as follows.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, six types of general-purpose registers 210b1, 210b2, 210c1, 210c2, 210d1, 210d2 are provided as general-purpose registers for temporarily storing data. Although only 6 types can be set at the maximum, the number of general-purpose registers may be increased to configure more setting destination addresses.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the first to third embodiments, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 performs the setting of the variation pattern when the jackpot is won, the setting during the jackpot, and the setting when the jackpot is finished. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be performed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first to third embodiments, the game result setting table 202e, the state setting table 202f, etc. are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be provided in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first to third embodiments, the various set value storage areas 203e are provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113.

  Further, the present invention may be carried out on a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, a pachinko machine that raises the expectation value for a jackpot once it hits the jackpot several times (for example, twice or three times) including that (commonly known as a two-time title, a three-time title, and May be implemented as). Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine for generating a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area after the jackpot pattern is displayed. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for confirming and displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a ball launching handle is not provided. There are things. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, or due to, for example, the operation of the stop switch or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stopping is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as a burden on equipment and a restriction on a place where a game machine is installed due to separate handling of a medal and a ball.

  Below, in addition to the game machine of the present invention, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment will be shown.

<Feature A group> (The process ends when 00H is read)
According to a predetermined control procedure, control means for executing game control, storage means for storing control data read by the control means, and specific data for which the control data read by the control means is predetermined Read control which is a process of repeatedly reading the control data and performing control based on the read control data according to the control procedure. When the processing is executed, the read control processing is ended based on the read control data being determined by the control data determining means to be the specific data, and the read control data is executed in accordance with the control procedure. A gaming machine A1 characterized by shifting to the processing of.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the control of the game is executed by the control means according to a predetermined control procedure, the control data read by the control means based on the control procedure is stored in the storage means, and the read control data is stored. The control data determination means determines whether the data is predetermined specific data. When the control unit executes the read control process of repeatedly reading the control data and the control based on the read control data, it is determined that the read control data is the predetermined specific data. Based on the determination made by the means, the read control process is ended, and the process proceeds to the next process executed according to the control procedure.

  As a result, in the read control process, if the specific data is read, the process shifts to the next process, so it is not necessary to specify how many times the control data read and the control based on the read control data are repeated. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the control from being performed a number of times different from the number of repetitions to be performed by the read control process due to a mistake in defining the number of repetitions. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game machine from malfunctioning.

  In the gaming machine A1, the control data is defined such that setting destination data indicating a setting destination for performing a game-related setting and setting data for setting the setting destination indicated by the setting destination data are alternately set. In the read control process, the data is read in the order specified by the control data, and the setting data to be read next is set in the setting destination indicated by the read setting destination data. A gaming machine A2 characterized by the above.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are produced. That is, the setting data indicating the setting destination for setting the game and the setting data for setting the setting destination indicated by the setting destination data are alternately defined in the control data. The data is read by the read control process in the order specified by the control data, and the setting data to be read next is set to the setting destination indicated by the read setting destination data.

  As a result, when reading data, it is not necessary to perform a process of determining which data out of the data specified in the control data should be read next, so that the processing load of the control means can be reduced. There is an effect that can be.

  The gaming machine A2 is provided with a state change determining means for determining whether or not to change the gaming state, and the control data is defined by various setting values relating to the gaming state as the setting data. A game machine A3, which executes the read control process when it is determined by the state change determination means that the game state is changed.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced. That is, whether or not to change the game state is determined by the state change determining means. Various setting values relating to the gaming state are defined in the control data as setting data. When it is determined by the state change determination means that the game state is changed, the read control processing is executed by the control means.

  As a result, when the gaming state is changed, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning without setting the setting value to be set.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A3, the specific data is data different from any other data defined in the control data.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A3. That is, since the specific data is different from any other data defined in the control data, the same data as the specific data is not read before the specific data is read from the control data.

  Therefore, since the read control process is repeated until the specific data is read, it is possible to prevent the read control process from being terminated before all the controls that should be performed by the read control process are executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game machine from malfunctioning because the control to be executed is not executed.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A4, the specific data is defined at the end of the control data, and the gaming machine A5 is provided.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machines A1 to A4, the specific data is defined at the end of the control data, so that control based on all other data defined in the control data is ensured. It has the effect that it can be executed.

<Characteristic B group> (0 is sequentially set to the addresses stored in the table until 00H is read)
According to a predetermined control procedure, a control means for controlling the game, and a storage means for storing a plurality of setting destination data indicating the setting destination for the setting of the game, the control means, according to the control procedure The reading process of sequentially reading the setting destination data from the storage unit and the setting process of setting a predetermined set value to the setting destination indicated by the setting destination data read by the reading process are repeatedly performed. A gaming machine B1 characterized in that.

  According to the gaming machine B1, according to a predetermined control procedure, the storage means stores a plurality of setting destination data indicating a setting destination where the control means for controlling the game performs setting regarding the game. The control means performs a reading process for sequentially reading the setting destination data from the storage means in accordance with a control procedure, and a setting process for setting a predetermined set value to the setting destination indicated by the setting destination data read by the reading process. It is repeated.

  Thus, the predetermined setting value can be set by the setting process without storing the setting value for setting the setting destination data read by the reading process in the gaming machine. Therefore, there is an effect that the amount of data stored in the predetermined set value can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B1, the control means performs the setting process based on the read one setting destination data every time the one setting destination data is read by the reading process. A gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, every time the setting destination data of 1 is read by the reading processing, the setting process is performed by the control means based on the read 1 setting destination data. Therefore, the amount of data read by the reading process and set by the setting process can be minimized.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the setting destination data is stipulated in an order of being read by the control means, and the gaming machine B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are produced. That is, since the setting destination data is defined in the order in which it is read by the control means, a process of determining which data among the data stored in the storage means should be read next each time the reading processing is performed. There is no need to do. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load of the control means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machines B1 to B3, the control means reads out by the determining means and the determining means that determines whether the setting destination data read out by the reading processing is predetermined specific data. And the avoidance means for avoiding the process of setting a predetermined setting value to the setting destination indicated by the read setting destination data when it is determined that the setting destination data is predetermined specific data. Characteristic game machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are produced. That is, the determination means determines whether or not the setting destination data read by the reading process is the specific data set in advance. When the determination means determines that the read setting destination data is predetermined specific data, the processing of setting a predetermined set value to the setting destination indicated by the read setting destination data is avoided. Avoided by means.

  Thus, even if the control program does not specify the number of times the read process and the set process are repeated, the read process and the set process can be repeated until the specific data is read. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the read control process from being terminated before all the controls that should be performed by the read control process due to a mistake in defining the number of repetitions. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game machine from malfunctioning because the control to be executed is not executed.

  In the gaming machine B4, the specific data is data different from any of the other setting destination data stored in the storage means.

  According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of the game machine B4, the following effect is achieved. That is, since the specific data is different from any of the other setting destination data stored in the storage means, the same data as the specific data is not read before the specific data is read from the storage means.

  As a result, the read process and the setting process are repeated until the specific data is read, so that it is possible to prevent the process from being terminated before all the controls that should be performed by the control means are executed. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game machine from malfunctioning because the control to be executed is not executed.

  In the gaming machine B4 or B5, the specific data is defined at the end of the setting destination data, the gaming machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B4 or B5, the specific data is defined at the end of the setting destination data, so control based on all other setting destination data stored in the storage means. There is an effect that can be surely executed.

  In the gaming machine B4, the predetermined set value is provided with a first set value and a second set value different from the first set value, and the control means causes the determination means to perform the control procedure. Until the setting destination data read according to the above is first determined to be predetermined specific data, the setting destination data is read and the first setting value is set to the setting destination indicated by the read setting destination data. After the first determination by the determination means that the setting destination data read according to the control procedure is the predetermined specific data, the setting destination data is read and the reading is performed. A gaming machine B7, characterized in that the processing for setting the second setting value to the setting destination indicated by the setting destination data is repeated.

  According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect of the game machine B4, the following effect is achieved. That is, the first set value and the second set value different from the first set value are provided as the predetermined set values. Until the determination unit first determines that the setting destination data read according to the control unit is predetermined specific data, the setting destination data is read and the setting destination indicated by the read setting destination data is first set. The process of setting the value is repeated by the control means. After the setting destination data read according to the control procedure is first determined to be the predetermined specific data, the setting destination data is read and the second setting value is set to the setting destination indicated by the read setting destination data. The processing to be performed is repeated by the control means.

  As a result, it is not necessary to store the first set value and the second set value in association with the setting destination, so that it is possible to reduce the amount of data stored in the storage unit.

<Characteristic C group> (The offset value is calculated from the big hit random number, and the offset value is held during the big hit)
In a gaming machine provided with a storage unit that stores information about a game and a control unit that controls a game, a game state determining unit that determines a game state and a game state determined by the game state determining unit are set to a predetermined value. A game state setting means for setting based on the establishment of a condition is provided, and the storage means stores setting data for setting a game state by the game state setting means and data necessary for selecting the setting data. A certain identification data is stored, and selection means for selecting the identification data corresponding to the game state determined by the game state determination means from the storage means, and the identification data selected by the selection means. Holding means for holding until at least the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the game state setting means is held by the holding means Gaming machine C1, characterized in that the setting data corresponding to the identification data are, and sets read from said storage means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the game state is determined by the game state determining means, and the setting data for setting the game state by the game state setting means and the identification data necessary for selecting the setting data are stored. Stored by means. The identification data corresponding to the game state determined by the game state determination means is selected from the storage means by the selection means, and the identification data selected by the selection means is held by the holding means until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The setting data corresponding to the identification data held by the holding means is read from the storage means and set by the game state setting means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

  As a result, the identification data corresponding to the gaming state determined by the gaming state determining means is held by the holding means, so that it is possible to prevent the method of determining the gaming state by the gaming state determining means from being obtained from the outside. .. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that are externally controlled by the game state determination means so as to determine a game state that is advantageous to the player.

  In the gaming machine C1, the size of the identification data is smaller than that of the setting data, the gaming machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the size of the identification data is smaller than that of the setting data. Therefore, the amount of data stored in the holding means is smaller than that in the case where the holding means holds the setting data. The effect is that it can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the storage means stores a plurality of state data for setting a game state from when the game state is determined by the game state determining means until a predetermined condition is satisfied. The identification data is stored in the storage means in association with each of the plurality of state data, and one state data is selected from the plurality of state data and set. A gaming machine C3, further comprising means, wherein the selecting means selects the identification data corresponding to the one state data selected by the state selecting means.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are produced. That is, the storage means stores a plurality of state data for setting the game state from when the game state is determined by the game state determining means to when the predetermined condition is satisfied. The identification data is stored in the storage means in association with each of the plurality of state data. One state data is selected from the plurality of state data and set by the state selecting means.

  Thus, when the identification data is selected by the selection means, it is only necessary to select the identification data stored in association with the one state data selected and set by the state selection means. There is an effect that the processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where the data and the data are selected independently.

  In the gaming machine C1, when the game state is determined by the game state determining means, state setting means for setting a game state different from the determined game state until the predetermined condition is satisfied is provided. A gaming machine C4 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, when the gaming state is determined by the gaming state determining means, a gaming state different from the determined gaming state is given a predetermined condition by the state setting means. Since it is set until the above condition is satisfied, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game until the predetermined condition is satisfied can be improved.

  In the gaming machines C1 to C3, an acquisition unit that acquires random information based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state that is advantageous to the player based on the random information. And a gaming state based on the random information obtained by the obtaining means when the gaming state determining means determines to shift to the special gaming state by the lottery means. The gaming state setting means sets the gaming state determined by the gaming state determining means on the basis of the end of the special gaming state, the gaming machine C4. ..

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are produced. That is, random information is acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the random information is determined by the lottery means. To be judged. When the lottery means determines to shift to the special game state, the game state determination means determines the game state based on the random information acquired by the acquisition means. Based on the end of the special gaming state, the gaming state setting means sets the gaming state determined by the gaming state determining means.

  As a result, since it is not necessary to retain the random information acquired by the acquisition means until the special gaming state ends, the information corresponding to the special gaming state among the random information is obtained from the outside by fraudulent acts. Can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of inputting information corresponding to the special game state from the outside and shifting to the special game state.

<Characteristic D group> (Data is read collectively and then data is set collectively)
According to a predetermined control procedure, a control means for controlling a game, a storage means for storing a plurality of setting destination data indicating a setting destination for performing the setting relating to the game, and a setting destination data stored in the storage means. A data storage area for storing the data, and a determination means for determining whether or not the setting destination data read by the control means is predetermined specific data, and the control means, in accordance with the control procedure, A read storage process for reading the setting destination data from the storage unit and storing the read setting destination data in the data storage area is repeated for a plurality of setting destination data, and the data storage area is obtained by the reading storage process. The batch setting process of collectively setting a predetermined set value to each of the setting destinations indicated by the plurality of setting destination data stored in In the reading and storing process, the batch setting process is performed based on the fact that the read setting destination data is the predetermined specific data determined by the determining means. Gaming machine D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, according to a predetermined control procedure, a plurality of setting destination data indicating a setting destination to which the control means for controlling the game makes settings regarding the game are stored by the storage means, and stored in the storage means. The setting destination data is stored in the data storage area. The determining means determines whether or not the setting destination data read by the control means is predetermined specific data. According to a control procedure, a read storage process of reading the setting destination data from the storage unit and storing the read setting destination data in the data storage area is repeated for a plurality of setting destination data, and data storage by the reading storage process. The control unit executes a collective setting process for collectively setting a predetermined set value to each setting destination indicated by the plurality of setting destination data stored in the area. In the reading and storing process, when the read out setting destination data is the specific data determined in advance by the determining means, the batch setting process is performed.

  As a result, if specific data is read in the read storage process, the process proceeds to the batch setting process. Therefore, in the read storage process, it is specified how many times the setting destination data is read and stored in the data storage area. There is no need. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the control from being performed a number of times different from the number of times of repetition to be performed by the read and storage processing due to a mistake in defining the number of times of repetition. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game machine from malfunctioning.

  In the gaming machine D1, the specific data is data different from any of the other setting destination data stored in the storage means, and the gaming machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the specific data is different from any other data defined in the control data, the same data as the specific data is not read before the specific data is read from the control data.

  As a result, the read storage process is repeated until the specific data is read, so that it is possible to prevent the read storage process from ending before all the controls that should be performed by the read storage process are executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game machine from malfunctioning because the control to be executed is not executed.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the specific data is stored at the end of the setting destination data, the gaming machine D3.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the specific data is defined at the end of the setting destination data, so control based on all other setting destination data stored in the storage means. There is an effect that can be surely executed.

  The gaming machine Z1 wherein each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball becomes a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through a winning opening), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow a ball to be won, and a value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

  The gaming machine Z2, wherein each gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence including a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine Z3, wherein each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operating lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Other>
Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, change the state by setting a set value to a plurality of setting destinations that make settings relating to the game state when the game state is changed. In such a gaming machine, in order to set a setting value, a setting destination to which the setting value is set and a setting value to be set in the setting destination are previously defined in a storage means such as a ROM, and the state is changed. Performs setting according to the contents defined in the storage means (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2002-000905).
However, among the plurality of setting destinations of such gaming machines, there may be setting destinations having common setting values. In this case, in the storage means, it is necessary to define common set values as many as the number of setting destinations for setting the set values, so that the same data is defined multiple times, increasing the amount of data in the storage means. There was a risk that
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the data amount.
<Means>
To achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 stores a plurality of control means for controlling the game according to a predetermined control procedure, and a plurality of setting destination data indicating a setting destination for the control means to make settings relating to the game. And a read processing for sequentially reading the setting destination data from the storage means according to the control procedure, and a predetermined setting destination indicated by the setting destination data read by the reading processing. The setting process for setting the respective setting values is repeated.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, wherein the control means sets the read-out one set-destination data to the read-out one set-destination data every time the read-out processing reads out the one set-up destination data. Based on this, the setting process is performed.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the setting destination data is defined in the order of being read by the control means.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the storage means stores a plurality of setting destination data indicating the setting destinations where the control means for controlling the game performs the setting related to the game according to the predetermined control procedure. The control means performs a reading process for sequentially reading the setting destination data from the storage means in accordance with a control procedure, and a setting process for setting a predetermined set value to the setting destination indicated by the setting destination data read by the reading process. It is repeated.
Thus, the predetermined setting value can be set by the setting process without storing the setting value for setting the setting destination data read by the reading process in the gaming machine. Therefore, there is an effect that the amount of data stored in the predetermined set value can be reduced.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, every time the setting destination data of 1 is read by the reading process, the read setting destination data of 1 Since the setting processing is performed by the control means based on the above, there is an effect that the amount of data read by the reading processing and set by the setting processing can be minimized.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effect is exhibited. That is, since the setting destination data is defined in the order in which it is read by the control means, a process of determining which data among the data stored in the storage means should be read next time every read processing There is no need to do. This has the effect of reducing the processing load on the control means.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
110 Main controller (control means)
202 ROM (storage means)
202h Big hit end clear table (storage means)
202j Big hit end initial value setting table (storage means)
S1502, S1513 Read processing S1504, S1511, S1515 setting processing

Claims (3)

According to a predetermined control procedure, control means for controlling the game,
The control means is provided with a storage means that stores a plurality of setting destination data indicating a setting destination for setting the game,
The control means is
A read process of sequentially reading the setting destination data from the storage unit according to the control procedure;
A game machine characterized by repeatedly performing a setting process for setting a predetermined set value to a setting destination indicated by setting destination data read by the reading process.   2. The control unit performs the setting process based on the read one setting destination data every time the one setting destination data is read by the reading process. Game machine.   The game machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the setting destination data is defined in an order of being read by the control means.

Images